Copy

This category describes copy features.



Basic Copying Method

This section describes the basic procedure for copying.

  1. Place originals on the platen glass or load them in the ADF.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  • Close the ADF/platen glass cover after placing your originals.

  1. Press [COPY].
  • The COPY indicator lights and the machine enters the copy standby mode.
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  • If you make a mistake when entering values, press [Clear] and enter the correct values.
  • The copy quantity appears on the right side of the display.
  1. Press [Start] to start copying.


Canceling Copy Jobs

This section describes how to cancel copy jobs.


Canceling Scanning or Outgoing Jobs

Canceling Reserved Jobs


Canceling Scanning or Outgoing Jobs

Return to Overview

You can cancel scanning or outgoing jobs.


Remark
  • If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the original.
  1. Press [Stop].
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

  • When scanning using the ADF:


  • When scanning using the platen glass:

  1. When the <CANCEL COPYING?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.

The display will return to the standby mode.



Canceling Reserved Jobs

Return to Overview

You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.

  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list.
  1. When the copy job you want to cancel appears on the display, press [OK], then press [] to select <YES>.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Selecting Paper Source

You can manually specify a paper source (paper drawer (1 or 2) or stack bypass) by pressing [Paper Select].


Remark
  • The suffix <R> (such as in LTRR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass horizontally.

Copying on Papers in Drawers

Using the Stack Bypass with Standard Paper Sizes

Using the Stack Bypass with Irregular Sizes of Paper

Using the Stack Bypass with Envelopes


Copying on Papers in Drawers

Return to Overview

You need to set up the paper size and type for each paper source in advance. For details about configuring the paper size and type, see "Setting Paper Type and Size."

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to select the paper drawer 1 or the paper drawer 2*.

The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.")
*The paper drawer 2 is optional.

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • You can set whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job. You can set whether to select the appropriate paper source based on the original size and copy ratio settings (Auto Drawer Select function) in <COPY> of <AUTO DRAWER SELCT> in <COMMON SETTINGS>. By setting each paper source (<DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2> (optional) or <STACK BYPASS>) to <ON>, you can activate the Auto Drawer Select function for each paper source.
  • You can set the default paper source for copying (<AUTO>, <DRAWER 1>, or <DRAWER 2> (optional)) in <PAPER SELECT> of <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <COPY SETTINGS>.


Using the Stack Bypass with Standard Paper Sizes

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto standard size paper using the stack bypass.


Remark
  • If <BYPASS STD SET> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the paper size and type for the stack bypass appear every time you load paper on the stack bypass. If <BYPASS STD SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size.")
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to select the stack bypass.

The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.")

  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

To copy onto standard size paper, select the paper size from the followings:
<LTR>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <CO10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-5>, <FREESIZE>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <LGL>
For details, see "Print Media."

  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

To copy onto standard size paper, select the paper type from the followings:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>
For details, see "Print Media."

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.



Using the Stack Bypass with Irregular Sizes of Paper

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto nonstandard size paper using the stack bypass.


Remark
  • If <BYPASS STD SET> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the paper size and type for the stack bypass appear every time you load paper on the stack bypass. If <BYPASS STD SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size.")
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to select the stack bypass.

The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.")

  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FREESIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the vertical size in <VERTICAL SIZE> (76 to 216 mm (3 to 8 1/2 nch)) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Enter the horizontal size in <HORIZONTAL SIZE> (127 to 356 mm (5 to 14 1/8 inch)) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can also press [] or [] to specify the size.
(<VERTICAL SIZE> represents the length of the paper that feeds into the machine.)

  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

To copy onto nonstandard size paper, select the paper type from the followings:
<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>
For details, see "Print Media."

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start]. for each original, once for each page.



Using the Stack Bypass with Envelopes

Return to Overview

This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass.


Remark
  • If <BYPASS STD SET> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the paper size and type for the stack bypass appear every time you load paper on the stack bypass. If <BYPASS STD SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size."
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to select the stack bypass.

The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.")

  1. Load envelopes into the stack bypass.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

To copy onto envelopes, select the paper type from the followings:
<LTR>, <SMTR>, <ECECUTIV>, <CO10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>, <FREESIZE>, <A>, <B>, <A5R>, <LGL>
If you select one of these size, <ENVELOPE> is automatically selected for the paper type.
For details, see "Print Media."

  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start]. for each original, once for each page.



Selecting Image Quality (Copy)

You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. The default setting is <TEXT>.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes TEXT, PHOTO, and TEXT/PHOTO cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the document type.

<TEXT>: For text documents.

<PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine text or photos.

<TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain text and photos.

  • Copy density automatically changes to the manual mode when <TEXT/PHOTO> or <PHOTO> is set.
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.



Adjusting Density (Copy)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either automatically or manually.


Adjusting Automatically (Copy)

Adjusting Manually (Copy)


Adjusting Automatically (Copy)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document automatically.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] to select <AUTO DENSITY>, then press [OK].
  • The image quality is automatically set to <TEXT>.
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start]. for each original, once for each page.



Adjusting Manually (Copy)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document manually.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] twice to select the manual mode.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].

[] : to make light documents darker

[]: to make dark documents lighter

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start]. for each original, once for each page.



Enlarge/Reduce Images

You can convert a standard size original to a different standard size copy (preset zoom), or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio). The default setting is <100%>.


Preset Zoom

Custom Copy Ratio


Preset Zoom

Return to Overview

You can enlarge or reduce from one standard paper size to another.

  1. Set original.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Copy Ratio].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the copy ratio, then press [OK].
  • 200% MAX.
  • 129% STMT → LTR
  • 100%
  • 78% LGL → LTR
  • 64% LTR → STMT
  • 50% MIN.
  • When <PAPER SIZE GROUP> in the <COPY SETTINGS> menu is set to <A> or <AB>, the preset copy ratios change as follows:
    A: 50%, 70%, 100%, 141%, 200%
    AB: 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.



Custom Copy Ratio

Return to Overview

You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Copy Ratio] twice.

You can use [] or [] to adjust the zoom ratio. To increase the zoom ratio, press []. To decrease the copy ratio, press [].

  • To return the copy ratio to 100%, press [Copy Ratio] repeatedly to display <100%>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.



2-Sided Copying

This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities. The default setting is <OFF>.
This feature can be used together with both "Collating Copies" and "Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (2 on 1)."


Remark
  • If you are copying in the two-sided mode, align the center of one edge of the original with the red arrow on the left side of the platen glass.
  • Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
  • Paper size: LGL and LTR (A4 loaded on the stack bypass is available as well.)
  • Paper weight: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)

1 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 2-Sided Copying


2 to 1-Sided Copying



1 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make two-sided copies from one-sided originals.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1> 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations.

For the landscape oriented documents, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • You can skip step 5. In this case, the machine scans one-sided originals to make two-sided, <BOOK TYPE> copies.
  • When you set the original on the platen glass, press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK].
  • If there are an odd number of originals when 1-Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of the last copy is left blank.


2 to 2-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make two-sided copies from two-sided originals.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <2> 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE> (for the origianals), then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE> (for the copies), then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • When you set the original on the platen glass, press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK].
  • You can skip steps 5 and 6. In this case, the machine scans two-sided originals in the <BOOK TYPE> orientation and outputs the same way.
  • If you press [Start] in step 5 after selected <CALENDAR TYPE>, the machine scans two-sided documents in the <CALENDAR TYPE> orientation and outputs the same way.


2 to 1-Sided Copying

Return to Overview

You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <2 > 1-SIDED>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK TYPE> or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • When you set the original on the platen glass, press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK].
  • You can skip step 5. In this case, the machine scans two-sided originals in the <BOOK TYPE> orientation to make one-sided copies.


Collating Copies

You can copy originals collated into sets arranged in page order. This feature can be used together with both "2-Sided Copying" and "Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (2 on 1)." The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  • If <AUTO COLLATE> is set to <COLLATE> in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <COPY SETTINGS>, skip step 3 and 4.
  1. Press [Collate].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

When the originals are loaded in the ADF, collate copying starts and no further operation is required.
If the original is placed on the platen glass and <ORIGINAL SIZE> is displayed in the display, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [OK].

  1. Place the next page of the document on the platen glass, then press [Start].

Repeat this step to scan all pages. The machine prints only one copy of each page.

  1. Press [OK].
  • The machine prints the remaining sets of copies.
  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • When scanning multiple page documents, <MEMORY FULL> may appear in the display and scanning may be canceled. If this happens, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (2 on 1)

2 on 1 mode automatically reduces two documents to fit on the selected paper size. This feature can be used together with both "Collating Copies" and "2-Sided Copying." The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • The 2 on 1 mode cannot be used with the Original Frame Erase mode, Book Frame Erase mode, or Binding Hole Erase mode. For details about those modes, see "Erasing Shadows/Lines."
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [2 on 1].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the size of the original, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].
  • When you set the document on the platen glass, press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK].
  • A maximum of 1/8 (2 to 3 mm) margin will be produced between the two reduced originals in 2 on 1 copying.


Erasing Shadows/Lines

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Hole Erase.


Remark
  • Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.

Original Frame Erase

Book Frame Erase

Binding Hole Erase


Original Frame Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.


Remark
  • The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the 2 on 1 mode.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ORIGINAL FR.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the size of the original, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to set the frame erase width for all four borders, then press [OK].

The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm).

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].


Book Frame Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.


Remark
  • The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the 2 on 1 mode.
  • You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
  1. Set an original on the platen glass.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BOOK FRAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the book size, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to set the book frame erase width for all four borders, then press [OK].

The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm).

  1. Press [] or [] to set the book frame erase width for the center of the book, then press [OK].

The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm).

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].


Binding Hole Erase

Return to Overview

This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.


Remark
  • The Binding Hole Erase mode cannot be used with the 2 on 1 mode.
  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [Copy].
  1. Press [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BINDING HOLE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to specify the location of the binding holes (<LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <TOP>, or <BOTTOM>), then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to set the binding hole erase width, then press [OK].

The width ranges 3/16" to 13/16" (3 to 20 mm)

  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.

  • To cancel all settings, press [Reset].

The locations of the binding holes to be erased are shown in the illustration below.


  • ADF


  • Platen Glass

A: LEFT

B: RIGHT

C: TOP

D: BOTTOM



Adjusting Sharpness (Copy)

You can set the sharpness of the copied image. The default setting is <5>.

  1. Set originals.

For details, see "Placing Originals."

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SHARPNESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select to adjust the sharpness (1 to 9), then press [OK].

The highest sharpness level is 9 and the lowest is 1. To copy text or lines clearly, select a high sharpness level. To copy originals containing printed images or other halftones, select a low sharpness level.

  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99) using - [numeric keys].
  1. Press [Start].

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press [Start] for each original, once for each page.



Changing the Standard Mode

The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when [Reset] is pressed. You can change the Standard mode to suit your needs.

  • The default settings are the followings.
    <IMAGE QUALITY>: TEXT
    <DENSITY>: AUTO
    <ZOOM RATIO>: 100%
    <COPIES>: 1
    <AUTO COLLATE>: OFF
    <TWO-SIDED>: OFF
    <FRAME ERASE>: OFF
    <PAPER SELECT>: AUTO
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting item of which mode you want to change, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select your desired setting mode, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Initializing the Standard Mode

This section describes how to initialize the current copy setting mode including standard mode.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT. COPY SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Reserved Copy

You can make copy settings and scan documents even if the machine is currently printing. The scanned documents are processed after the current job is complete.

  1. Set originals.
  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Set the desired copy mode and quantity (1 to 99), then press [Start].

You can reserve up to 5 copy jobs, with different settings for each job.



Fax

This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions. This section describes also the settings and procedures for sending and receiving fax documents, and for forwarding received fax documents. Fax functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.



Introduction to Using Fax Functions

This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions.

Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Date and time

Set the current time and date. (See "Set Date and Time.")

  • Your fax number

Register your machine's fax number. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")

  • Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)."

  • Fax receiving mode

Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")

  • Your telephone line type

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")



Sending Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Canceling Send Fax Documents

Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Using Numeric Keys (Fax)


Using the Address Book (Fax)


Using the One-Touch Keys (Fax)


Using Coded Dial Codes (Fax)


Using the Group Addresses (Fax)


Specifying a Group from the One-touch Keys (Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Fax)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)


Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

Adjusting Density (Fax)

2-Sided Originals (Fax)

Direct Sending (Fax)

Job Recall (Fax)

Favorites Buttons (Fax)

Registering a Favorites Button (Fax)


Erasing a Favorites Button (Fax)


Using the Favorites Buttons (Fax)


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax)

Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)


Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)

Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

ECM Transmission (Fax)

Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax)

Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax)


Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending faxes.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].

The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number using -, and [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong number when specifying a fax number, go back to the wrong digit with [].

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start dialing.

If you want to cancel sending, press [Stop] on the operation panel. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK]. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, select <YES> with [].

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Return to Overview

Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.


Remark
  • You cannot use the platen glass for manual sending.
  • You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.
  • You cannot use Two-Sided scanning mode for manual sending.
  1. Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document.

For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see "Connect Telephone Cables."

  1. Load your originals in the ADF.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your document.
  1. Press [Hook] or pick up the handset of your external telephone.
  1. Dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.
  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using the numeric keys, you must enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in step 7, then press [OK].
  1. Talk through the handset to the recipient.
  • If you select <Hook> in step 6, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipient's voice. If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient's voice, go to step 10.
  1. Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.
  1. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press [Start], then hang up the handset.


Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax)

Return to Overview

If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).


Remark
  • To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Hook].
  • Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not be connected, or the wrong number may be dialed.
  1. Enter the number of the fax information service using - [numeric keys].
  1. When the recorded message of the information service answers, press [Tone] to switch to tone dialing.
  1. Enter the numbers requested by the information service using - [numeric keys].
  1. If you want to receive faxes, press [Start].

If you are using the external telephone, hang up the handset after pressing [Start].



Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax)

Return to Overview

When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your documents.
  1. Enter the international access code using - [numeric keys].

For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company.

  1. If necessary, press [Pause] to insert a pause.
  • The letter <p> is displayed between the numbers.
  • You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer.
  • You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in the <PAUSE TIME> menu. The default setting is two second.
  1. Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax/telephone number of the recipient.
  1. Press [Pause] to enter a pause at the end of the number.
  • The letter <P> appears at the end of the fax number.
  • Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON>, you should enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in steps 5 to 8 → press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

When you set the originals on the platen glass, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Canceling Send Fax Documents

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press [Stop] during transmission.
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

  • When scanning using the ADF:


  • When scanning using the platen glass:

  1. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • For sending jobs, remove any unscanned originals from the ADF.


Specifying Destinations (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch key, a coded dial code or specify a new destination.



Using Numeric Keys (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify a new fax number using - , , and [numeric key].

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], then press [OK].

If you entered a wrong number when specifying a fax number, go back to the wrong digit with [].

  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - [numeric keys], you must enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in step 3, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Address Book (Fax)

Return to Overview

The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark
  • You cannot search for the destinations registered under favorites buttons using [Address Book].
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Address Book].

If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL SEARCH>, then press [OK].

<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name

<ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by fax number



  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the fax number with - and [numeric keys].

For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press (ABC). Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered. Press [Tone] to switch between input modes: Number mode

[:a]: Letter mode

[:1]: Number mode

  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.

[]: displays recipients in alphabetical order.

[]: displays recipients in reverse order.

  1. When the recipient's name is displayed, press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - and [numeric keys], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.



Using the One-Touch Keys (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 23 destinations in the one-touch keys.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 23).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - and [numeric keys], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Using Coded Dial Codes (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial].
  1. Enter the desired three digit code (000 to 176) with - [numeric keys].

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Group Addresses (Fax)

Return to Overview

Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with the numeric keys.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (Fax)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and perform step 3 again.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Fax)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial] followed by the three digit code under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and perform step 3 again.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - , [numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - , [numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

Use - , [numeric keys], one-touch keys, coded dial codes, favorites buttons, or [Address Book] to specify destinations.

  • Only one destination can be specified using - , [numeric keys].
  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - , [numeric keys] you must enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in step 4 → press [OK].
  1. Repeat step 4 to enter all required recipients.
  • If you want to enter a fax number using the - , [numeric keys] in the middle of the procedure, press [SEND], select the sending method, and then enter the number.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
  • You can enter the send settings by pressing [SEND] and selecting the protocol for which you want to perform send settings.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Selecting Image Quality (Fax)

You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. The default setting is <FINE>.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."

  1. Press [Image Quality].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality, then press [OK].

You can also press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the image quality.

Fax: <FINE>, <PHOTO>, <SUPER FINE>, <ULTRA FINE>, <STANDARD>

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Adjusting Density (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."

  1. Press [Density].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the density, then press [OK].

[]: to make light documents darker.

[]: to make documents lighter.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



2-Sided Originals (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)."

  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the binding type, then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Direct Sending (Fax)

Return to Overview

With direct sending, the machine sends the document on the ADF as it scans one page, without storing all pages into memory at once. You can send a document ahead of other documents stored in memory. The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • You cannot use the platen glass for direct sending.
  • You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending.
  • You cannot use group dialing for direct sending. If you specify a group, the direct sending mode is canceled, and the document is sent in the memory sending mode.
  • You cannot use Two-Sided scanning mode for direct sending.
  • With direct sending, the machine scans one page into memory at once and sends it right away. Therefore, when <MEMORY FULL> is displayed, even if you have selected direct sending, wait until there is enough space in memory to scan one page, or delete the documents in memory, and try again. (See "Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents.")
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Direct TX].

To cancel direct sending, press [Direct TX] again.

  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your document.
  1. Dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.

If you select delayed transmission or sequential broadcasting, memory sending is automatically selected.

  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - [numeric keys], you must enter the fax numaber again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in step 6, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

Each page is sent as it is scanned.

  • During transmission, <TRANSMITTING...> and the recipient's fax/telephone number alternately appear as messages on the display.


Job Recall (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Recall].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1 BEFORE>, <2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that the desired recipient is displayed.

You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Favorites Buttons (Fax)

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.

Registering a Favorites Button (Fax)

Erasing a Favorites Button (Fax)

Using the Favorites Buttons (Fax)


Registering a Favorites Button (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].

If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the name of the destination's fax number (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality (<FINE>, <PHOTO>, <SUPER FINE>, <ULTRA FINE>, or <STANDARD>), then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <OPTIONAL SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to set the optional settings, select <OFF>, then skip to step 20.

If you want to set the options for sending faxes, select <ON>.

  1. Confirm that <ECM> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SPEED> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the sending speed (33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, or 4800 bps), then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <INTERNATIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the transmission option (<DOMESTIC>, <LONG DISTANCE 1>, <LONG DISTANCE 2>, or <LONG DISTANCE 3>), then press [OK].
  • If errors occur during international fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing a Favorites Button (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key registered as a favorites button (M1 to M4) you want to erase, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the fax number the registered name and combination of send settings in a favorites button is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Using the Favorites Buttons (Fax)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key registered as a favorites button (01 to 04).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

  1. Adjust any necessary settings for your document.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - and [numeric keys], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Open the one-touch panel.
  1. Press [Delayed TX].
  1. Enter the time you want to start sending using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the time in 24-hour/military time format.
  • Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
  1. Specify the destination.
  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you specify a fax number using - [numeric keys], you must enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in step 7 → press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the originals size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the destination by any other method than using - and [numeric keys], the machine starts scanning automatically without pressing [Start], after the preset time for this setting is elapsed.
  • If the document cannot be sent at the time specified for delayed sending due to a temporary power failure (that recovers within an hour), it will be sent at the specified time on the next day.


Standard Send Settings (Fax)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can change and store the Standard Send Settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <DENSITY>: Sets the default density for the document you send (<STANDARD> (standard density), <DK> (darkest), or <LT> (lightest)). (See "Adjusting Density (Fax)")
  1. Each time you set the desired setting item, press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT STANDARD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] to select [ON], then press [OK].

To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [] to select <OFF>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).

  • Decreasing the sharpness:
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.
  • Increasing the sharpness:
  • You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SHARPNESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the sharpness (1 - 7), then press [OK].

Each time you press [] , the sharpness is decreased. Each time you press [], the sharpness is increased.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

Return to Overview

This setting enables you to set the machine to match the telephone dialing system your telephone line uses: touch-tone or rotary pulse.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USER SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].

<TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default)

<ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing

Be sure to check the type of telephone line you are using and make the correct setting. If this setting is incorrect, you will not be able to communicate with other machines.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


ECM Transmission (Fax)

Return to Overview

ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored.
If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off. The default setting is <ON>.


Remark
  • If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Transmission be set in both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ECM TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The ECM transmission is not activated.

<ON>: The ECM transmission is activated.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

Return to Overview

Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection.


Remark
  • Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the international access code using - and [numeric keys].

For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company.

  1. If necessary, press [Pause] to insert a pause.
  • The letter <p> is displayed between the numbers.
  • You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer.
  • You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in the <PAUSE TIME> menu. The default setting is two seconds.
  1. Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax/telephone number of the recipient.
  1. Press [Pause] to enter a pause at the end of the number.
  • The letter <P> appears at the end of the fax number.
  • Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
  • If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON>, you should enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax number you entered in steps 5 to 8, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the document size, then press [Start] for each document. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Automatic redialing enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned <ON> or <OFF>. If you set <AUTO REDIAL> to <ON>, you can set how many times the machine redials the number, and the redial interval.
The default setting is <ON>. (The default setting of <REDIAL TIMES> is <2TIMES>, and the default setting of <REDIAL INTERVAL> is <2MIN.>.)

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO REDIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REDIAL TIMES> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the number of redials (1 to 10 times) the machine will make using [], or [] or [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REDIAL INTERVAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the time (2 to 99 minutes, in oneminute increments) between redials using [] or [], or [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX ERROR REDIAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: Resends all pages if an error occurs during transmission.

<OFF>: Does not redial even if an error occurs during transmission.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax)


Return to Overview

The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Dial Line Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening. If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had intended. Setting <DIALING LINE CHCK> to <ON> enables you to avoid such sending problems. The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
 
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIALING LINE CHCK>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving fax documents.


Methods for Receiving Faxes

FaxOnly


FaxTel


Manual


AnsMode


DRPD


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Basic Methods for Receiving Faxes

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)

ECM Reception (Fax)

Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax)

Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax)

Activating Remote Receive Mode (Fax)


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)


Methods for Receiving Faxes

Your machine offers several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the best fax receive mode for your needs.



FaxOnly

Return to Overview

In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically. Use this mode for a fax on a dedicated telephone line that you do not need for telephone voice communication.

  • Before using this mode

All you have to do is set <RX MODE> to <FaxOnly>.

  • When an incoming call comes in

The machine will receive fax documents automatically. For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller in this mode; the caller will hear a slow beep tone.


Remark
  • Setting <RX JOB DONE TONE> to <ON> enables the machine to ring for helping you find fax documents are being received. (See "COMMON SETTINGS.")


FaxTel

Return to Overview

In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically for fax calls and ring for telephone calls.

  • Before using this mode

Be sure to do the following:

  • Make sure <INCOMING RING> is set to <ON> so that the external telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call.
  • When an incoming call comes in

Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:

  • The machine will receive fax documents automatically for fax calls.
  • The machine will ring for telephone calls. Pick up the handset, then start your conversation.



Manual

Return to Overview

When you select <Manual> in <RX MODE>, follow the procedure below to receive a fax.

  • Before using this mode

Be sure to do the following:

  • When an incoming call comes in



AnsMode

Return to Overview

In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine will record a message for telephone calls.

  • Before using this mode

Be sure to do the following:

  • Set your answering machine to answer after 1 through 2 rings.
  • Record your message on your answering machine.
  • When an incoming call comes in


Remark
  • Be sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically.


DRPD

Return to Overview

DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.

  • Before using this mode

Be sure to do the following:

  • Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone campany for availability.


Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the fax receive mode to suit your needs. The default setting is <FaxOnly>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired receive mode, then press [OK].

<FaxOnly>: Answers all calls as faxes.

<FaxTel>: Switches between fax and voice calls automatically. For optional settings, see "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)."

<AnsMode>: Receives faxes automatically and records voice messages.

<DRPD> (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection): Distinguishes between fax and voice calls using distinctive ring patterns. Select the ring pattern assigned by your telephone company. For optional settings, see "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)."

<Manual>: Does not answer any calls. You have to manually receive faxes.

  • For <FaxTel> or <Manual>, make sure an external telephone is connected to the machine.
  • For <FaxTel>, make sure <INCOMING RING> is set to <ON> so that the external telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call.
  • For <AnsMode>, make sure an answering machine is connected to the machine.
  • For <DRPD>, subscription to a DRPD service is required. Contact your telephone company for availability.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Basic Methods for Receiving Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes how the machine operates when it receives fax documents.

  1. When documents are being received, the Processing/Data indicator on the operation panel flashes a green light.

  1. When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data indicator on the operation panel maintains a steady green light. This indicates that documents are stored in memory.

  • The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
  • The Error indicator flashes a red light when either the amount of available memory is low or paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
  1. The document is printed.

The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.

  • If there is no paper on which the received document can be printed, the received document is stored in memory.
  • Documents which have been stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
  • If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TWO- SIDED PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Reducing a Received Document (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether the received images print out at a reduced size.
The default setting is <ON> (<AUTO> and <VERTICAL ONLY>).

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RECEIVE REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO> or <FIXED REDUCTION>, then press [OK].

If you select <AUTO>, the image is reduced automatically. Skip to step 10.

If you select <FIXED REDUCTION>, go to step 9.

  1. Press [] or [] to select a preset reduction ratio (90%, 95%, 97%, or 75%), then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REDUCE DIRECTION> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VERTICAL ONLY> or <HORIZ & VERTICAL>, then press [OK].

<VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document vertically only.

<HORIZ & VERTICAL>: Reduces the document both horizontally and vertically.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set if the machine stores all documents in memory or continue printing without storing documents in memory, when the toner runs out. The default setting is <RX TO MEMORY>.


Remark
  • When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <KEEP PRINTING>, you can continue printing. The printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  • When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <RX TO MEMORY>, the machine stores all documents in memory. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the documents can be printed and the setting can be reset.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONT. PRINTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX TO MEMORY> or <KEEP PRINTING>, then press [OK].

<RX TO MEMORY>: The machine stores all documents in memory.

<KEEP PRINTING>: You can continue printing.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


ECM Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If reception speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up reception time by turning ECM off.
The default setting is <ON>.


Remark
  • If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Reception be set in both the sending and receiving machines. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ECM RX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The ECM reception is not activated.

<ON>: The ECM reception is activated.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the <Manual> mode. The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • This function is only available when the <RX MODE> is set to <Manual>.
 
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX/TEL OPT. SET> , then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <RING START TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the period of time (0 to 30 seconds) before the machine starts ringing after receiving a voice call using [] or [], or [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.

  1. Confirm that <F/T RING TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the duration (15 to 300 seconds) for the phone to ring, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <F/T SWITCH ACTION> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].

If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.
<RECEIVE>: Switches to the receive mode.
<DISCONNECT>: Disconnects the call.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

Return to Overview

This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone if <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>. Selecting <ON> in <INCOMING RING> enables you to distinguish between the fax reception and answer voice calls when you pick up the external telephone while it is ringing. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INCOMING RING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • If you select <OFF>, the telephone does not ring when the machine receives a voice call or fax. (In the Sleep mode, the telephone may ring one or two times, if <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>.)
  1. Press [] or [] to select the number of incoming rings (1 to 99 times) before the machine answers.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax)

Return to Overview

Remote reception enables you to use an external telephone connected to the machine to receive faxes manually. This can be useful when the machine is not nearby or is being used by someone else. The default setting is <ON>, and the default remote reception ID is <25>.



Activating Remote Receive Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to activate the remote receive mode.


Remark
  • This function is not available when <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>.
  • The machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified time, if <MANUAL/AUTO> of <RX SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> of <TX/RX SETTINGS> is set to <ON>.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REMOTE RX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

If you do not want to change the default remote reception ID, skip to step 9.

  1. Press [Clear] twice to delete the default remote reception ID of 25.
  1. Enter a new remote reception ID (a combination of two characters) using and [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to receive documents with the remote reception.


Remark
  • Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings:
  • An extension telephone is connected properly.
  • Your telephone is set to tone dialing.
  1. When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.
  1. Enter the two-digit remote reception ID using and [numeric keys].

If the machine is set for pulse dialing, press [Tone] to switch to tone dialing before pressing the remote reception ID.

  1. When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax)

Return to Overview

The machine automatically receives faxes in memory when printing is disabled under certain conditions (e.g., toner or paper has run out). You can also set the machine to store all documents in memory without automatically printing them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - and [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password using -[numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • When you select <OFF>, the machine starts to print the received documents in memory.
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the memory reception password (seven digits maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REPORT PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print an RX report.

<ON>: Prints an RX report.

  • <RX REPORT> should also be set to <OUTPUT YES> so that RX reports are automatically printed when documents are received in memory. For instructions, see "RX REPORT."
  1. Confirm that <MEMORY RX TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 16.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MEM RX START TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the start time (in 24-hour/military time format) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MEM. RX END TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the end time using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - , [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the memory reception password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Forwarding Received Fax Documents

You can set the machine to forward received fax documents to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Forwarding settings can be made using the Remote UI.


Remark

Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax)


Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax)

Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)


Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax)

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.



Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:

  • Forwarding conditions are set:

The machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.

  • Forwarding conditions are not set:

The machine will forward all received documents.


Remark
  • [Forwarding Settings] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • To forward only documents that meet specified forwarding conditions:
  • 1. Click [] [Add New Conditions].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Receive Type: Select [Fax] for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select [Enable This Forwarding Condition], this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded. The setting items differ depending on the type of the receiving mode:
Items for Fax:
[disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
[does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.
  • To forward all received documents without specific conditions:
  • 1. Click [Forwarding without Conditions].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

  1. Select the receiving mode from [Receive Type].

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.



Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Select the check box next to the forwarding condition to delete → click [] [Delete the Selected Conditions].

  • You cannot recover the setting once it is deleted.


Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click [Print Forwarding Conditions List].



Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click the condition name to display the current forwarding setting.

  1. To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].



Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can transfer the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.

  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
  • You can transfer only the documents received in memory, which appears with the message <RX STNDBY> in the system monitor.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TRANSFER>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the destination, then press [OK].

The machine starts to send the selected document.

  • You can specify only one destination registered in a one-touch button or coded dial code.


Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <STORE TO MEMORY> is set to <ON> in <FORWARD ERR. SET.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TRANSFER>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the destination, then press [OK].
  • You can specify only one destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If transferring is successful, it is erased from the machine's memory.


Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check the status of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <STORE TO MEMORY> is set to <ON> in <FORWARD ERR. SET.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS")
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:
  • Press [] or [] to select the document you want to erase, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] to select <YES>, then press [OK].

To cancel erasing the job, select <No>.

  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

  • If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:
  • Press [] or [] to select the document you want to print, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].

To cancel printing the job, select <No>.

  • To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

System monitor enables you to view the transmission and reception results, and monitor the status of the send and receive jobs currently being processed.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the job log does not appear in the display.

Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Printing the Fax Log


Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the status of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.


  • Checking Transmission Results

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to view the required transmission result.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, transmission result does not appear in the display.

  • Checking and Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.
  • If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the status of fax documents currently being received, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.


  • Checking Reception Results

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to view the required reception result.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, reception result does not appear in the display.

  • Checking and Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].

If you select a document with the message <RX TRM...>, skip to step 5.


  1. If you want to delete the document, press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing the Fax Log

Return to Overview

You can print the results of fax transactions (transmission or reception). TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually.


  • TX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that to select <TX REPORT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.


  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print the first page.

<ON>: Prints the first page.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination fax number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call

  • RX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Reception Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Recipient's fax/telephone number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Sender's name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Reception time
  • TIME USE: Reception duration
  • PGS.: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion

  • ACTIVITY REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <AUTO PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.


  1. Confirm that <TX/RX SEPARATE> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.

<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/ address
  • NO.: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed

If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually.



I-Fax

This section describes the things that you must do before using I-fax functions. This section describes also the settings and procedures for sending and receiving I-fax documents, and for forwarding received I-fax documents. I-fax functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.



Introduction to Using I-Fax Functions

Internet faxing (I-fax) enables you to send and receive fax documents over the network. Scanned documents are converted to TIFF format and are transmitted as an attachment file of an e-mail message to the recipient I-fax compatible machine. For I-fax functions, instead of specifying the recipient fax number, you enter the e-mail address.

This section describes the things that you must do before using I-fax functions.

Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")

  • Time and date

Set the current time and date. (See "Set Date and Time.")

  • Network settings

Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")

  • E-mail settings

Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax.")


Remark
  • An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet.


Sending I-Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending I-fax documents.


Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes

Canceling Send I-Fax Documents

Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)

Using Numeric Keys (I-Fax)


Using the Address Book (I-Fax)


Using the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax)


Using Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax)


Using the Group Addresses (I-Fax)


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax)


Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax)


Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax)


Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax)

Adjusting Density (I-Fax)

2-Sided Originals (I-Fax)

Job Recall (I-Fax)

Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)

Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax)


Erasing a Favorites Button (I-Fax)


Using the Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)


Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax)

Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax)

Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)


Send Settings (I-Fax)

Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax

Subject/Message (I-Fax)

Reply-to (I-Fax)

Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)

Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes

Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes


Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of sending I-faxes.


Remark
  • When sending I-faxes, the file format is automatically set to <TIFF (B&W)> , and the resolution can be selected from <200 x 200dpi> or <200 x 100dpi>.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].

The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the I-fax address using - and [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong character when specifying an I-fax address, go back to the wrong character with [], then press [Clear]. Or press and hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 9.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution for <IMAGE QUALITY>, then press [OK].

I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  1. Press [] or [] to select the for the original type for <ORIGINAL TYPE>, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Canceling Send I-Fax Documents

Return to Overview

This section describes how to specify an I-fax address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book, a one-touch key, or a coded dial code, or specify a new address.

  1. Press [Stop].
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

  • When scanning using the ADF:


  • When scanning using the platen glass:

  1. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • For sending jobs, remove any unscanned original from the ADF.


Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)

This section describes how to specify an I-fax address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch key, or specify a new address.



Using Numeric Keys (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area, I-fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I-fax.


Remark
  • When sending I-faxes, the file format is automatically set to <TIFF (B&W)> , and the resolution can be selected from <200 x 200dpi> or <200 x 100dpi>.
  • You can specify only one destination at a time using - , [numeric keys].
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the I-fax address with - and [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If you entered a wrong character when specifying an I-fax address, press [] to go back to the part you want to correct, then press [Clear]. You can also delete the entire entry by pressing and holding [Clear].

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

f the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Address Book (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark
  • You cannot search for the destinations registered under favorites buttons using [Address Book].
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Address Book].

If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL SEARCH>, then press [OK].

<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name

<ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address

  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the I-fax address with - and [numeric keys].

For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [] (ABC). Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered. Press [Tone] to switch between input modes:

[:A]: Letter mode

[:1]: Number mode

  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.

[]: displays recipients in alphabetical order.

[]: displays recipients in reverse order.

  1. When the recipient's name is displayed, press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.



Using the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 23).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Using Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial].
  1. Enter the desired three digit code (000 to 176) with - [numeric keys].

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Group Addresses (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the one-touch key under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial] followed by the three digit code under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys.]) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

Use - and [numeric keys], one-touch keys, coded dial codes, favorites buttons, or [Address Book] to specify destinations.

  • Only one destination can be specified using - and [numeric keys].
  1. Repeat step 4 to enter all required recipients.
  • If you want to enter an I-fax address using - and [numeric keys] in the middle of the procedure, press [SEND], select <I-FAX>, and then enter the address.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. The default setting is <200X200 dpi>.


Remark
  • You can also specify the resolution (Image Quality) by pressing [OK] after specifying the destination. For instructions, see "Send Settings (I-Fax)."
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)."

  1. Press [Image Quality].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality, then press [OK].

You can also press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the image quality.

I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Adjusting Density (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)."

  1. Press [Density].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the density, then press [OK].

[]: to make light documents darker.

[]: to make documents lighter.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



2-Sided Originals (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)."

  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the binding type, then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Job Recall (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Recall].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1 BEFORE>, <2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that the desired recipient is displayed.

You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.

Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax)

Erasing a Favorites Button (I-Fax)

Using the Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)


Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].

If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <IFAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <I-FAX ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's I-fax address (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

You can select from <200 x 200dpi>, <200 x 400dpi>, <300 x 300dpi>, <400 x 400dpi>, <600 x 600dpi>, <100 x 100dpi>, <150 x 150dpi>, and <200 x 100dpi>.

  • The image is sent in <200x200dpi> even if you select <200x400dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <100X100dpi>, or <150X150dpi>.
  1. Confirm that <ORIGINAL TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type (<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, or <PHOTO>), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing a Favorites Button (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a favorites button (M1 to M4) you want to erase, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the I-fax address, the registered name and combination of send settings in a favorites button is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Using the Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button.
Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key registered as a favorites button (01 to 04).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Open the one-touch panel.
  1. Press [Delayed TX].
  1. Enter the time you want to start sending using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the time in 24-hour/military time format.
  • Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
  1. Specify the destination.
  1. Press [Start].

The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If the document cannot be sent at the time specified for delayed sending due to a temporary power failure (that recovers within an hour), it will be sent at the specified time on the next day.


Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RETRY TIMES>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to enter the number of retry attempts (0 to 5 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can change and store the Standard Send Settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <DENSITY>: Sets the default density for the document you send (<STANDARD>(standard density), <DK> (darkest) or <LT> (lightest)). (See "Adjusting Density (I-Fax).")
  • <ORIGINAL TYPE>: Sets the default original type for the document you send. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")
  • <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>: Sets whether to use <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> as default. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).")
  1. Each time you set the desired setting item, press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT STANDARD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select [ON], then press [OK].

To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [] or [] to select <OFF>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Send Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can optionally set, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the I-fax address.


Remark
  • The file format is automatically set to <TIFF (B&W)> when sending an I-fax.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For details, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)."

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution for <IMAGE QUALITY>, then press [OK].

I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type for <ORIGINAL TYPE>, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax

Return to Overview

You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter the document's name.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX FILE NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the document's name (24 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Subject/Message (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter a subject line, message body text.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SUBJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the subject (40 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MESSAGE TEXT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the message body text (140 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Reply-to (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter reply-to address.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPLY-TO>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the reply-to address (120 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys] , then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).

  • Decreasing the sharpness

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.

  • Increasing the sharpness

You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SHARPNESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the sharpness (1 - 7), then press [OK].

Each time you press [] , the sharpness is decreased. Each time you press [], the sharpness is increased.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing I-fax documents. If an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error and is not sent.


Remark
  • When sending an I-fax document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending. (See "Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes.")
  • When sending an I-fax document, decrease the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the maximum data size.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MAX TX DATA SIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to specify the maximum data size for outgoing I-fax documents (0 to 99 MB), then press [OK].
  • If an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This function enables you to divide an I-fax document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes."

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIVIDED OVER MAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select [ON], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving I-Faxes

This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving I-fax documents.


Basic Methods for Receiving I-Faxes

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)

Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)

Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (I-Fax)

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax)


Basic Methods for Receiving I-Faxes

Return to Overview

This section describes how the machine operates when it receives I-Fax documents.

  1. When documents are being received, the Processing/Data indicator on the operation panel flashes a green light.

  1. When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data indicator on the operation panel maintains a steady green light. This indicates that documents are stored in memory.

  • The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
  • The Error indicator flashes a red light when either the amount of available memory is low or paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
  1. The document is printed.

The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.

  • If there is no paper on which the received document can be printed, the received document is stored in memory.
  • Documents which have been stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
  • If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.


Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TWO-SIDED PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set whether the received images print out at a reduced size.
The default setting is <ON> (<AUTO> and <VERTICAL ONLY>).

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RECEIVE REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REDUCTION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO> or <FIXED REDUCTION>, then press [OK].

If you select <AUTO>, the image is reduced automatically. Skip to step 10.

If you select <FIXED REDUCTION>, go to step 9.

  1. Press [] or [] to select a preset reduction ratio (90%, 95%, 97%, or 75%), then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REDUCE DIRECTION> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VERTICAL ONLY> or <HORIZ & VERTICAL>, then press [OK].

<VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document vertically only.

<HORIZ & VERTICAL>: Reduces the document both horizontally and vertically.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can set if the machine stores all documents in memory or continue printing without storing documents in memory, when the toner runs out.
The default setting is <RX TO MEMORY>.


Remark
  • When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <KEEP PRINTING>, you can continue printing. The printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
  • When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <RX TO MEMORY>, the machine stores all documents in memory. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the documents can be printed and the setting can be reset.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONT. PRINTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX TO MEMORY> or <KEEP PRINTING>, then press [OK].

<RX TO MEMORY>: The machine stores all documents in memory.

<KEEP PRINTING>: You can continue printing.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

The machine automatically receives I-Faxes in memory when printing is disabled under certain conditions (e.g., toner or paper has run out). You can also set the machine to store all documents in memory without automatically printing them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception. The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - and [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].

If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • When you select <OFF>, the machine starts to print the received documents in memory.
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the memory reception password (seven digits maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <REPORT PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print an RX report.

<ON>: Prints an RX report.

  • <RX REPORT> should also be set to <OUTPUT YES> so that RX reports are automatically printed when documents are received in memory. For instructions, see "RX REPORT."
  1. Confirm that <MEMORY RX TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].

If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 16.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MEM RX START TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the start time (in 24-hour/military time format) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MEM. RX END TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the end time using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - , [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MEMORY LOCK>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the memory reception password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Forwarding Received I-Fax Documents

You can set the machine to forward received I-fax documents to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Forwarding settings can be made using the Remote UI.


Remark

Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)


Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)


Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.



Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:

  • Forwarding conditions are set:

The machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.

  • Forwarding conditions are not set:

The machine will forward all received documents.


Remark
  • [Forwarding Settings] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • To forward only documents that meet specified forwarding conditions:
  • 1. Click [] [Add New Conditions].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Receive Type: Select [I-Fax] for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select [Enable This Forwarding Condition], this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded. The setting items differ depending on the type of the receiving mode.
Items for I-Fax:
[disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.
Forwarding Destination: Specify an address from the Address Book by clicking [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list → click [OK].
Forwarding Settings: If you are forwarding documents to an e-mail address or a file server, you can set their file format to [TIFF] or [PDF]. If you select [Divide into Pages], you can forward files as divided pages.
  • To forward all received documents without specific conditions:
  • 1. Click [Forwarding without Conditions].

  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

  1. Select the receiving mode from [Receive Type].

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.



Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Select the check box next to the forwarding condition to delete → click [] [Delete the Selected Conditions].

  • You cannot recover the setting once it is deleted.


Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click [Print Forwarding Conditions List].



Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click the condition name to display the current forwarding setting.

  1. To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].



Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can resend the I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <STORE TO MEMORY> is set to <ON> in <FORWARD ERR. SET.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TRANSFER>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the destination, then press [OK].
  • You can specify only one destination registered in a one-touch key or coded dial code.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If transferring is successful, it is erased from the machine's memory.


Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

Return to Overview

You can check the status of I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.


Remark
  • Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <STORE TO MEMORY> is set to <ON> in <FORWARD ERR. SET.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORWARD ERR. STATUS>, then press [OK].

  • If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error:

  • Press [] or [] to select the document you want to erase, then press [OK].


  • Press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] to select <YES>, then press [OK].

To cancel erasing the job, select <No>.

  • To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

  • If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:

  • Press [] or [] to select the document you want to print, then press [OK].


  • Press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].

To cancel printing the job, select <No>.

  • To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Changing the Status of I-Fax Documents in Memory

The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission and reception results, and monitor the status of the send and receive jobs currently being processed.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the job log does not appear in the display.

Checking Arrival of I-Fax

Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents

Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents

Printing the I-Fax Log


Checking Arrival of I-Fax

Return to Overview

The machine regularly checks for the arrival of I-faxes. However, you can check for the arrival of I-faxes at any time using the System Monitor key.


Remark
  • To be able to check the arrival of I-fax using the System Monitor key, you must first set <POP> (Post Office Protocol) to <ON> in <E-MAIL/ I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, so that you can receive documents using POP.
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CHECK RX I-FAX JOB>, then press [OK].

The machine starts checking the arrival of I-faxes and receives them.



Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the status of I-Fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, and delete unwanted documents as necessary.


  • Checking Transmission Results

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to view the required transmission result.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, transmission result does not appear in the display.

  • Checking and Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.
  • If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the status of I-fax documents currently being received, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.


  • Checking Reception Results

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX LOG>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to view the required reception result.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, reception result does not appear in the display.

  • Checking and Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].

If you select a document with the message <RX TRM...>, skip to step 5.


  1. If you want to delete the document, press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing the I-Fax Log

Return to Overview

You can print the results of fax transactions (transmission or reception). TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually.


  • TX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that to select <TX REPORT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.


  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print the first page.

<ON>: Prints the first page.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination fax number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call

  • RX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Reception Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Recipient's fax/telephone number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Sender's name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Reception time
  • TIME USE: Reception duration
  • PGS.: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion

  • ACTIVITY REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <AUTO PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.


  1. Confirm that <TX/RX SEPARATE> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.

<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • Report Items

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/ address
  • NO.: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed

If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually.



PC Fax

This category describes how to send documents created using application software from your computer.
PC Fax functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.



System Requirements (PC Faxing)

The fax driver can be used in the following system environments:

  • Operating System Software
  • Microsoft Windows 2000
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008
  • Computer

Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly.

However, at least one of the following output ports is required:

  • parallel printer port (LPT1, LPT2, etc.)
  • USB port
  • network interface

Remark
  • To send faxes from computers on the imageRUNNER 1025, an optional network printer kit is required.


Where to Find Help (PC Faxing)

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the fax driver.


  • README. TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your fax driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. This file is located in the [DRIVERS] folder.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your fax in the Online Help file provided with the driver. In the fax properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the fax driver.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers

If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.



Faxing Fundamentals

This section explains the fundamental operations of the fax driver, such as how to display the fax driver, and how to send a fax from a computer.


Faxing a Document

Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand

Setting Up the Fax Configuration

Viewing the Online Help (PC Faxing)


Faxing a Document

Return to Overview

The procedure for faxing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • If an error occurs in the printer while sending a fax, send the document once more from the fax driver. The fax job sent from the fax driver for which an error occurred will be erased.
  • Up to 500 fax transmission recipients can be stored in the device. If the number of recipients exceeds 500 after a fax job has been sent to the device, the last job to be input will be erased. Be careful when registering more than 500 recipients in groups or when sending a fax continuously to multiple groups.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Open the document you want to fax from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  • The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.
  1. Select your fax driver from [Name], then click [Properties].

The fax driver screen is displayed.

  • The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
    See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  • The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Specify recipient name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add to Recipient List].

  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • You can select a recipient from the address book by clicking [Address Book]. See "Using the Address Book" about the address book.
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination" for changing where you save the address book.
  1. If you want to attach a cover sheet, select [Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

Faxing begins.



Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand

Return to Overview

To specify the default settings for faxing documents, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When faxing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The fax driver screen is displayed.

The fax driver screen includes the following sheets.

  • [Edit Address Book] sheet
  • [Register Cover Sheet] sheet
  • [Special] sheet

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be asigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed fax driver screen.

For details about the fax driver settings, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.

  1. Click [OK].


Setting Up the Fax Configuration

Return to Overview

To configure the fax conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • Full control access is required to configure the fax settings. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system setings.
  • If you use this procedure in a shared printer environment, Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be installed on the print server. For details about installing Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Properties] from the displayed menu.

The printer properties dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If the information request returns an error message, you need to select and configure such settings as optional fax board, memory, etc. installed in the fax you are using manually.
  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  1. Confirm the settings → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help (PC Faxing)

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the fax driver screen.

See "Faxing a Document" or "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Useful Fax Functions

This section explains useful functions for sending faxes, such as scheduling the fax send time, attaching a cover sheet, etc.


Setting the Fax Send Time

Attaching a Cover Sheet


Setting the Fax Send Time

Return to Overview

You can store the data temporarily in the printer, and send the fax at the specifyed time.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Specify the recipient name and fax number → click [Add to Recipient List].

  1. Select [Set the Time to Send] → specify the time to send the fax.

Specify a time from 0:00 to 23:59.

  1. Click [OK].

The data is stored temporarily in the printer, and the fax is sent at the specified time.



Attaching a Cover Sheet

Return to Overview

To attach a cover sheet to the fax, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on how a cover sheet is attached. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Cover Sheet] sheet in the [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box.

See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Select an option for attaching the cover sheet to the fax from [Cover Sheet Attachment].

Select one of the following options:

  • [None]
  • [Different Sheet to Each Recipient]
  • [Same Sheet to All Recipient]

  1. Select a cover sheet template from [Style].

  1. Click [Settings] to specify the items to include on the cover sheet.

If you do not specify the items to include on the cover sheet, proceed to step 12.

The [Item Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Sender] sheet → enter the information in the text boxes for the selected items.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Sender Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept.⁄Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • You can save the information entered in the [Sender] sheet in a file by clicking [Save Sender]. Then, when you send a fax, you can import the information by using [Import Sender], instead of entering the sender information each time you send a fax.
  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Recipient] sheet.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Recipient Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept.⁄Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • The information of the recipients specifyed in the [Sending Settings] sheet prints on the cover sheet.
  1. Display the [Logo] or [Signature] sheet.

  1. Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] to include a logo or signature on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [Browse] to select a bitmap logo or signature file name for [File Name] → specify the magnification and position of the selected logo or signature.
  1. Display [Sheets to Send] sheet → select [Include Number of Sheets to Send] → enter the number of sheets you are going to send as a fax.

  • The number of sheets is not counted automatically. The number which you entered manually is shown on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Insert Attention Note] to insert an attention note → select a note from [Attention Note].

  • You can also enter the characters you want to insert. You can enter up to 30 characters.
  1. Enter any other information you want to include on the cover sheet in [Comment to include].

  1. Click [Preview] if you want to check the preview image on the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.



Using the Address Book

This section explains how to use the address book, and includes the procedures for registering individual and group addresses, editing the address book, etc. You can also specify destinations from address books created in applications other than the fax driver.


Remark
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination" for changing where you save the address book.

Single Person Entry

Group Entry

Importing Address Book Entries

Exporting Address Book Entries

Changing the Address Book Export Destination


Single Person Entry

Return to Overview

You can register addresses for individual people in the address book.


Remark
  • You can register up to 3000 address entries for individual people.
  • If you are using Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, or if you do not have access privileges to the destination folder for the address book in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 (default is Power User privileges or higher), you cannot browse or edit the address book. If this is the case, log on again as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a fodler such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered single person addresses. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Person].

The [Add Person] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter information about the new person such as their name and company name.

  1. Enter the fax number.
    You can also enter information concerning the fax number in [Description].

  • You can register two fax numbers: a primary number and a secondary number
  • You can also use the subaddress function (a function that enables you to send documents with a password attched to a memory box at the other end) in some devices. If you want to use this function, click [Settings].
  1. Enter any additional information about the person in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.

  • If you specify two fax numbers for a single individual destination, two fax numbers with the same name will be displayed in the address book.


Group Entry

Return to Overview

You can register groups in the address book. As well as the addresses of individual people in a group, you can also register other registered groups as sub-groups.


Remark
  • You can register the group address up to 3000 entries.
  • If you are using Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, or if you do not have access privileges to the destination folder for the address book in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 (default is Power User privileges or higher), you cannot browse or edit the address book. If this is the case, log on again as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a fodler such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered group destination information. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Group].

The [Add Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the new group name → select what to register from [Show].

Select what to register from among the following:

  • [Person]
  • [Group]
  • [All]

  1. Select person or group entries as menbers of the new group from the [Available Recipients] list → click [Add].

To remove a member of the selected group, select the person or group entry you want to remove from the [Current Group Members] list → click [Delete].

  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.
  1. Enter the keyword of the new group in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.



Importing Address Book Entries

Return to Overview

You can load data from CSV (*.csv) files or Canon Address Book files (*.abk) into the address book. If you load CSV format data, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Import].

The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the file to import → click [Open].

Select the type of the file to import from [Files of type]: CSV Files (*.csv), Canon Address Book(*.abk), All Files(*.*)

The address book is imported, and added to the list.



Exporting Address Book Entries

Return to Overview

You can save data registered in the address book as a CSV (*.csv) file or a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you save it in CSV format, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Export].

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the file name → click [Save].

Select the type of the file to export from [Save as type]: CSV Files (*.csv) or Canon Address Book(*.abk)

The specified address book is saved as a file.



Changing the Address Book Export Destination

Return to Overview

You can change the save destination of the address book of the fax driver (the Canon Fax Driver Address Book), or create a new address book.


Remark
  • You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to this folder).
    If you are not permitted access to the folder, save the address book file in another folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.
  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Specify a Folder].

The [Browse for Folder] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the folder to save the address book → click [OK].

  • Save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  1. If you want to create an address book, click [New], or if you want to copy the existing address book to the specified folder, click [Copy].

  • If an address book already exists in the folder selected in step 3, the following message box will be displayed. If you want to use the existing address book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to use the address book of the fax driver, click [Overwrite].



Printing from a Computer

This category describes how to print from computers.



Introduction to Using Print Functions

The Canon PCL5c, PCL5e, PCL6, and UFRII LT printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers.

This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver.

For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection."
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your Computer to the machine, see "USB Connection."

  • UFRII LT

Using the UFRII LT printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host Computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.
You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.

  • PCL

The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. This machine supports the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers.


Remark
  • The PCL printer is optional.
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software".
  • Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

Printing through USB Connection

Printing through Network Connection

Where to Find Help (Print)


Printing through USB Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through a USB connection, see "USB Connection."


Remark
  • Before installing a printer driver through a USB connection, turn the printer OFF. Turn the power back ON only if the instruction to do so appears on the screen during installation.
  • In a USB environment, you cannot set up the printer configuration automatically or use the Job Accounting feature.


Printing through Network Connection

Return to Overview

To install the printer driver through network, see "Network Connection."



Where to Find Help (Print)

Return to Overview

Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the printer driver.

  • README.TXT file

Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your printer driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. The README.TXT file is located in the [DRIVERS] folder.

  • Online Help

You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your printer in the Online Help provided with the driver. In the printer properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the PCL5c, PCL5e, PCL6 and UFRII LT printer driver. For instructions on how to display the Online help, see "Viewing the Online Help (Print)." See the Online Help for the detailed information on specifying PCL and UFR II options.

  • Canon Authorized Dealers or Service Providers

If the Online Help does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider.



Printing Fundamentals

This section explains how to print a document and how to display the online help.


Remark
  • To use the printer, you need an appropriate printer driver.
  • For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection."
  • For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your PC to the machine, see "USB Connection."

Printing with the Printer Driver

Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Setting the Printer Configuration

Viewing the Online Help (Print)


Printing with the Printer Driver

Return to Overview

The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see "Set Up Computers and Software."
  • The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.
  • To use the bar code printing function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit and optional Barcode Printing Kit are required. For details on the bar code printing function, see Bar Code Printing Guide (supplied with the optional Barcode Printing Kit).
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Open the document you want to print from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Select your printer from [Select Printer], then click [Page Setup].

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  1. Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen.

  1. Click [Print] or [OK].

Printing begins.



Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

Return to Overview

To change the printing options, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When printing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Settings] → [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
  • Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
  • Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
  • Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to change → click [Printing Preferences] from the drop-down menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be asigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system setings.
  1. Make the required settings on the [Printing Preferences] screen.

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The settings made on the printing preferences screen in this procedure apply to all Windows applications and remain in effect until you change those settings.

  • If you access the printing preferences screen or printer property screen from an application's [Print] dialog box, your selected printing options apply only to the current print job. They will not be stored when you close the application.


Setting the Printer Configuration

Return to Overview

To change the printer properties, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • Full control access is required to configure the settings for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Settings] → [Printers].

The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.

  • Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
  • Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
  • Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
  • Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to change → click [Properties] from the drop-down menu.

The printer properties screen is displayed.

  1. Select [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If the information request returns an error message, you need to configure the settings (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) manually.
  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, the function version of the device is obtained together with the device information. If the function version cannot be obtained, print a device status page from the device, verify the function version → click [Function] and set the function version manually. The available printer driver functions differ depending on the function version.
  1. Confirm the settings such as paper source options and output options → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help (Print)

Return to Overview

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Printing Functions

This section explaines what you can do in each sheet of the printer driver UI.


Remark
  • The items displayed in the printer driver window differ depending on the printer model you are using.
  • Some functions may not be available depending on the printer model you are using.
  • The procedures described in this section are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.

Common Functions

[Page Setup] Sheet

[Finishing] Sheet

[Paper Source] Sheet

[Quality] Sheet


Common Functions

Return to Overview

The following functions are common to all sheets. The numbers in the descriptions correspond with the ones in the image of the screen at the bottom.


1

Selecting a Profile for Printing

You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings.

4

Preview

The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview.

2

Adding/Editing Profiles

You can add and edit profile settings.

5

Verifying Settings

You can verify the settings specified in each sheet.

3

Changing the Output Method

You can change the output method, e.g. storing a document in an inbox.




[Page Setup] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Page Setup] sheet, you can configure the following settings. The numbers in the descriptions correspond with the ones in the image of the screen at the bottom.


1

Output Paper Size

Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer

4

Watermark

Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document.

2

Print Direction

Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper.

5

Page Border

Prints each page with a border.

3

Page Layout

Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper.

5

Header/Footer

Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc.




[Finishing] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Finishing] sheet, you can configure the following settings.


1

2-sided Printing

Prints on the front and back of the paper.

3

Collating

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order.

2

Booklet Printing

Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output.

4

Grouping

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers.




[Paper Source] Sheet

Return to Overview

In the [Paper Source] sheet, you can do the following.


1

Printing on Transparencies

Prints on transparencies. You can also insert interleaving pages between the transparencies.




[Quality] Sheet

Return to Overview

On the [Quality] sheet, you can configure the following settings.


1

Objective

Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content.

3

Grayscale Setting

Adjusts grayscale settings manually.

2

Toner Reduction

Prints with a reduced amount of toner.




Scaling Documents

You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in letter size to print on statement, or enlarging a document created in statement size to print on letter.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.



Remark
  • Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size.
  • If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.
  • The display may differ depending on to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].

  1. Select output size of the document from [Output Size].

The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

  1. If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].

  • If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].
  1. Click [Print] or [OK].



Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving paper, and it is also useful for saving space.



Remark
  • Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies with the application you are using, do not use it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
  • You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
  • The display may differ depending on to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver.
  • Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select the page layout from [Page Layout].

  1. Select the page order from [Page Order].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [Print] or [OK].



2-sided Printing

This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.



Remark
  • For details on the printer driver settings, see Online Help.
  • The display may differ depending on to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

  1. Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [Print] or [OK].



Booklet Printing

You can create a booklet by printing 2 pages on both sides of each sheet of paper.



Remark
  • You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] sheet when performing Booklet Printing.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style] → click [Booklet].

The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens.

  1. Specify the detailed settings such as [Booklet Printing Method], and [Booklet Gutter] → click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet is displayed.

  • For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK] in the [Finishing] sheet.


Poster Printing

You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster.


Remark
  • When outputting the pages face up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided) starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face down, the sequence starts from the bottom right and proceeds to the left.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page layout for poster from [Page Layout].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Watermark Printing

You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can register the customized watermark other than the various predefined watermarks.



Remark
  • You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Watermark] → select watermark for printing.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can display the [Edit Watermark] dialog box, and create and register new watermarks based on previously registered ones. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Edit Watermark] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK].


Viewing the Print Preview

You can display a preview and verify the print results prior to printing.


Remark
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method].

  1. Set the printing conditions in each of the sheets in the printer driver UI → click [OK].

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the document you want to see a print preview of from [Document Name] → click the [Print Preview] button.

The print preview is displayed.

  • In Canon PageComposer, not only can you display a print preview, you can also merge and edit print jobs. For details, see the Canon PageComposer online help.


Selecting a Profile for Printing

Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles". This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list.


Remark
  • To select a profile, you need to select [Allow Profile Selection] in the [Profile] sheet of the printer properties dialog box (→"Setting the Printer Configuration"). To change this setting, you need full control access for the device. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system setings.
  • The display may differ depending on the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000.
  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select a profile from the [Profiles] list according to your objective.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Checking and Canceling Print Jobs

You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts.


Checking Print Jobs

Canceling Print Jobs


Checking Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can check the number of prints and the print result of print jobs from the display of the machine.


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status.
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to scroll through the job list.

The job status for each print job appears on the display.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Canceling Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can cancel a print job from the machine before the printing starts.


Remark
  • Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no print jobs in the memory.
  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the print job you want to cancel.
  1. When the print job you want to cancel appears on the display, press [OK], then press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printer Settings from the Machine

This category describes Printer Settings which you can specify from the machine.



Settings Menu

Some settings can be made from the machine. For details on the setting procedure and available settings, click the desired title below to access the corresponding page.


Remark
  • Some of these settings may also be available from the printer driver.
    In this case, settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu.

Making the Printer Settings from the Machine

DEFAULT PAPERSIZE

DEFAULT PAPERTYPE

COPIES

2-SIDED PRINTING

PRINT QUALITY

IMAGE REFINEMENT


DENSITY


TONER SAVER


PAGE LAYOUT

BINDING


MARGIN


COLLATE

ERROR TIME OUT

INIT.PRINTER SET

PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only)

ORIENTATION (PCL Only)


FONT NUMBER (PCL Only)


POINT SIZE (PCL Only)


PITCH (PCL Only)


FORM LINES (PCL Only)


SYMBOL SET (PCL Only)


CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only)


APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only)


ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only)


BarDIMM(PCL Only)


RESET PRINTER


Making the Printer Settings from the Machine

Return to Overview

To set up from the machine, select <PRINTER SETTINGS> in the Additional Function menu.
Follow the procedure below to make the settings. For the list of available printer settings, see Settings Menu.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting option you want to specify, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The <DEFAULT PAPERSIZE> screen is used as an example.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


DEFAULT PAPERSIZE

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify the default paper size when no paper source is specified.

The default setting is <LTR>.


Remark
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEFAULT PAPERSIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available settings are <LTR>, <STMT>, <EXECUTIV>, <ISO-B5>, <ISO-C5>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, and <LGL>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


DEFAULT PAPERTYPE

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.

The default setting is <PLAIN PAPER>.


Remark
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEFAULT PAPERTYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available settings are <PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVYPAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, and <ENVELOPE>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


COPIES

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed.

The default setting is <1>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COPIES>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from <1> to <999>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


2-SIDED PRINTING

Return to Overview


This parameter enables you to select one-sided or two-sided printing. When <2-SIDED PRINTING> is specified, the document is printed on both sides of the paper.

The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • Two-sided printing can use either the paper drawer or the stack bypass with the following sizes.
  • LTR*, STMT, EXECUTIV, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, MONARCH, DL, A4, B5, A5, LGL
    An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
  • Two-sided printing can use paper within the following range:
  • 64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
  • When printing on letterhead paper, or paper with a logo (such as a cover sheet), please note the following:
  • If the paper is fed from a paper drawer, the printing surface should be face down.
  • If the paper is fed from the stack bypass the printing surface should be face up.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <2-SIDED PRINTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.
  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


PRINT QUALITY

Return to Overview

This setting enables you to specify the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing.


IMAGE REFINEMENT

DENSITY

TONER SAVER


IMAGE REFINEMENT

Return to Overview


This setting smoothes the jagged outlines of characters and graphics.

The default setting is <ON>.


Remark
  • The results of image refinement may be different depending on the types of characters and graphics you want to print.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT QUALITY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IMAGE REFINEMENT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.

If <ON> is selected, smoothing is performed before printing.

If <OFF> is selected, jobs are printed without being smoothed.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


DENSITY

Return to Overview


This setting adjusts the print density.

The default setting is <5>.


Remark
  • This function is not available if <TONER SAVER> is set to <ON>.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT QUALITY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DENSITY>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

Pressing [] makes the print image darker, pressing [] makes the image lighter.

The available setting is from <1> to <9>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


TONER SAVER

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set the Toner Saver function. Toner Saver uses less toner to print documents and may result in longer toner life.

The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • Depending on the data to be printed, <TONER SAVER> may not be applied even if <ON> is selected.
  • If <ON> is selected for <TONER SAVER>, very light or finely detailed images may not be printed clearly.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT QUALITY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TONER SAVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.
  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


PAGE LAYOUT

Return to Overview

This setting enables you to specify the binding position or margin.


BINDING

MARGIN


BINDING

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set the binding position for two-sided printing.

The default setting is <LONG EDGE>.


Remark
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LAYOUT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BINDING>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is <LONG EDGE> or <SHORT EDGE>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


MARGIN

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set the page margin in inches or millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) from -1.90 inches (-50.0 mm) through +1.90 inches (+50.0 mm).

The default setting is <0.00INCHES>.


Remark
  • If this setting moves the image outside the printable area, part of the image may be cut off.
  • Pressing [] increases the setting value by 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [] decreases the value by 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) each time. Holding down either [] or [] continuously speeds up the value alteration.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LAYOUT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MARGIN>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from -1.90 to +1.90INCHES (-50.0 to +50.0MM).

Use [] or [] to adjust the margin.

You can specify the edge along which the margin will be created in the <BINDING> setting (previous setting). To create a margin along one of the edges of the paper, use this setting in combination with the <BINDING> setting.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


COLLATE

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set whether to collate the printouts automatically into sets arranged in page order.

The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COLLATE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <COLLATE>.
  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


ERROR TIME OUT

Return to Overview


When a document is printed on the computer, the machine detects the control commands and starts printing in the appropriate mode. After all the data has been received and the end of the data is detected, the print mode stops. This processing of print data is called a job.

If the data for a job does not end, the machine does not start the next job even if it receives other print commands. In cases like this, use the Timeout setting to force jobs to finish if no data is received during the set period of time.

If Timeout is enabled, jobs can finish automatically. For example, if print data still remains in the machine because a form feed command cannot be processed, the paper can be fed automatically.

If <ERROR TIME OUT> set to <OFF>, jobs will not end automatically.

The default setting is <ON> and 15 seconds.


Remark
  • If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long time for the PC to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of the <ERROR TIME OUT> setting.
  • If you send data from a printer driver that is not compatible with the machine, and the end of job command is not received within the time set in this setting, the machine cancels the job, which may cause the data to be printed incorrectly.
  • When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel blinks green.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ERROR TIME OUT>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available settings are <ON> or <OFF>.

If you set to <ON>, jobs will end automatically after the period of time set. The time setting rage is from <5> to <300> seconds.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


INIT.PRINTER SET

Return to Overview


The menu settings can be reset to the factory defaults by initialising the printer settings.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • Do not turn OFF the machine while the settings are being initialised, as doing so may damage the machine's memory.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT.PRINTER SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.

If you select <ON>, the confirmation message is displayed. Select <YES> to initialize the settings or select <NO> to cancel the operation.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the PCL mode.
  • To use these functions with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.

ORIENTATION (PCL Only)

FONT NUMBER (PCL Only)

FONT SIZE (PCL Only)

PITCH (PCL Only)

FORM LINES (PCL Only)

SYMBOL SET (PCL Only)

CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only)

APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only)

ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only)


ORIENTATION (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set the paper orientation.

The default setting is <PORTRAIT>.


Remark
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ORIENTATION>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is <PORTRAIT> or <LANDSCAPE>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


FONT NUMBER (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


You can set the default font typeface for this printer function using the corresponding font numbers.

The default setting is <0>.


Remark
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FONT NUMBER>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from <0> to <120>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


POINT SIZE (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


If the number selected in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 points.

The default setting is <12.00>.


Remark
  • This function is available if a value from <1> to <69> is specified in <FONT NUMBER>.
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POINT SIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from <4.00> to <999.75>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


PITCH (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify the pitch for the default font in 0.01 cpi (characters per inch) increment.

The default setting is <10.00>.


Remark
  • This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch scalable font.
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PITCH>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from <0.44> to <99.99>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


FORM LINES (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page.

The default setting is <64>.


Remark
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FORM LINES>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available setting is from <5> to <128>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


SYMBOL SET (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.

The default setting is <PC8>.


Remark
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYMBOL SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the setting.

The available settings are <DESKTOP>, <ISO4>, <ISO6>, <ISO11>, <ISO15>, <ISO17>, <ISO21>, <ISO60>, <ISO69>, <ISOL1>, <ISOL2>, <ISOL5>, <ISOL6>, <LEGAL>, <MATH8>, <MCTEXT>, <MSPUBL>, <PC775>, <PC8>, <PC850>, <PC852>, <PC8DN>, <PC8TK>, <PC1004>, <PIFONT>, <PSMATH>, <PSTEXT>, <ROMAN8>, <VNINTL>, <VNMATH>, <VNUS>, <WIN30>, <WINBALT>, <WINL1>, <WINL2>, and <WINL5>.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify a custom paper size.

The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  • Settings made from the printer driver will override settings made in the <PRINTER SETTINGS> menu. If the selected printing options are not reflected correctly, check the printer driver settings.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CUSTOM PAPER>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.
  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.

If you select <OFF>, skip this step.

If you select <ON>;

  • UNIT OF MEASURE

The available setting is INCHES or MILLIMETERS.
The default setting is <INCHES>.

  • X DIMENSION (horizontal size of paper)

The available setting is from 5.00 to 14.00 (inches) (127 to 356 (mm)).

  • Y DIMENSION (vertical size of paper)

The available setting is from 3.00 to 8.50 (inches) (76 to 216 (mm)).

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.

The default setting is <NO>.


Remark
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <APPEND CR LF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NO> or <YES>.

If <YES> is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received.

If <NO> is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next line).

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.

The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
  • This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PCL SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ENLARGE A4>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.

If <ON> is selected, all the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases.

If <OFF> is selected, all the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.


  Settings ON OFF
A: Length 11 3/8 inches (288.54 mm)
B: Width 8 inches
(203.22 mm)
8 inches
(201.54 mm)
C: Left and right edges 1/8 inches
(3.39 mm)
1/4 inches
(4.23 mm)
D: Top and bottom edges 1/4 inches (4.23 mm)

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


BarDIMM (PCL Only)

Return to Overview


This setting enables you to set whether to use the bar code printing function.

The available setting is <ENABLE> or <DISABLE>.
The default setting is <ENABLE>.


Remark
  • This setting is available only if the bar code printing function is activated. For instructions on how to activate the bar code printing function, see the manual included with the Barcode Printing Kit.
  • To use this function with the imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit and optional Barcode Printing Kit are required.


RESET PRINTER

Return to Overview


You can clear all print jobs in progress and reset all the printer settings to the factory defaults.

The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINTER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESET PRINTER>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>.

When you select <ON>, the reset operation will be performed.

  • You can return to the previous screen by pressing [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [OK] to determine the setting and to proceed to the next screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Scanning Documents to a File Server

This section describes the things that you must do before sending scanned documents to a file server.
This section describes also the settings and procedures for sending scanned documents to a file server.
The function of scanning documents to a file server is available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to a file server. Scanned documents are converted to file formats, such as TIFF, and are transmitted to the specified file server.



Introduction to Using Scanner Functions - Scanning Documents to a File Server

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to a file server. Scanned documents are converted to file formats, such as TIFF, and are transmitted to the specified file server.
This section describes the things that you must do before scanning documents to a file server.
Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Network settings:

Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings")

  • File server settings:

Set the file server settings to enable your machine to communicate with a file server. (See "Setting Scan to File Server")



Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server

This section describes the basic procedure for sending scanned documents to a computer that acts as a file server on a network.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].

The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the scan standby mode.

  1. Specify the file server's address.

You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book].

For information how to specify the file server's address, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 9.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format, then press [OK].

File server (FTP and SMB): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>

  • <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white.
  • <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

If you have selected <JPEG> in step 5, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format.

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  • If <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400X400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, or <200X100dpi> can be selected.
  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected.
  • If <JPEG> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, or <150X150dpi> can be selected.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 5, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 9.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary.

You can set the document's name (see "Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server",) ,and the message body text (see "Message (Scan to File Server)".



Canceling Scan Documents to a File Server

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press [Stop].
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

  • When scanning using the ADF:


  • When scanning using the platen glass:

  1. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • For sending jobs, remove any unscanned originals from the ADF.


Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)

This section describes how to specify the destination to send documents using a file server. You can select a destination stored in the one-touch key or coded speed dial code.


Remark
  • Set the following items when sending to a file server:
  • Protocol
  • Host Name
  • Folder Name
  • User Name
  • Password
  • You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or [Address Book] key.

Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Using the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server)

Using Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server)

Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server)

Specifying a Group from the One-touch keys (Scan to File Server)


Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server)



Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark
  • You cannot search for the destinations registered under favorites buttons using [Address Book].
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Address Book].

If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL SEARCH>, then press [OK].
  • <NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name
  • <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address
  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the address with - and [numeric keys].

For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [] (ABC).Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered. Press [Tone] to switch between input modes:

  • <:A>: Letter mode
  • <:1>: Number mode
  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.
  • []: displays recipients in alphabetical order.
  • []: displays recipients in reverse order.
  1. When the recipient's name is displayed, press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.



Using the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 23).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Using Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial].
  1. Enter the desired three-digit code (000 to 176) with - and [numeric keys].

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server)

Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group.


Remark


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server)

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the one-touch key under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server)

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial] followed by the three digit code under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Scan to File Server)

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Specify the destination.

Use the one-touch keys, coded dial codes, favorites buttons, or [Address Book] to specify destinations.

  1. Repeat step 3 to enter all required recipients.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Adjusting Density (Scan to File Server)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

  1. Press [Density].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the density, then press [OK].
  • []: to make light documents darker.
  • []: to make documents lighter.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Selecting Image Quality (Scan to File Server)

You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

  1. Press [Image Quality].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality, then press [OK].

You can also press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the image quality.

File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected.
  • If <JPEG> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, or <150X150dpi> can be selected.
  • If <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400X400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, or <200X100dpi> can be selected.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



2-Sided Originals (Scan to File Server)

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

  1. Press [2-Sided].

For instructions on selecting sending methods and specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)."

  1. Press [] or [] to select the binding type, then press [OK].
  • <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.
  • <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Job Recall (Scan to File Server)

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Recall].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1 BEFORE>, <2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that the desired recipient is displayed.

You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server)

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.

Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server)

Erasing a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server)

Using the Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server)


Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the server protocol (<FTP> or <SMB>), then press [OK].

For details on each protocol, see "Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys" or "Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes."

  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <HOST NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the name of the file server on the network (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

For instructions on entering the file server name, see "Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys" or "Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes."

  1. Confirm that <FILE PATH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the file path to the folder to which the job is to be sent (120 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <LOGIN NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the login name (24 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password.

  1. Confirm that <IMAGE FORMAT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format (<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, or <JPEG>), then press [OK].

<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white.
<PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images.

  1. Confirm that <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  • If you have selected <JPEG> as the file format in step 17, multiple images are sent as separate files even if you set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <OFF>.
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

You can select from <200x200dpi>, <200x400dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>, and <200x100dpi>.

  • If you want to send color images in the <PDF (COMPACT)> format, select <300x300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you want to send color images in the <JPEG> format, select <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x200dpi>, or <300x300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you have selected <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> as the file format in step 17 and <100X100dpi> or <600X600dpi> as the resolution, the image is sent in <200x200dpi> resolution.
  1. Confirm that <ORIGINAL TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type (<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, or <PHOTO>), then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 17, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 24.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a favorites button (M1 to M4) you want to erase, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the entire entry, then press [OK].

You can also use [Clear] to delete characters one by one.

  • If you erase the file server name, the rest of the settings are cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Using the Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key registered as a favorites button (01 to 04).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Scan to File Server)

Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Open the one-touch panel.
  1. Press [Delayed TX].
  1. Specify the destination.
  1. Enter the time you want to start sending using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the time in 24-hour/military time format.
  • Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
  1. Press [Start].

The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If the document cannot be sent at the time specified for delayed sending due to a temporary power failure (that recovers within an hour), it will be sent at the specified time on the next day.


Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server)

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DATA COMPRESSION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NORMAL>, <HIGH RATIO>, or <LOW RATIO>, then press [OK].
  • <NORMAL>: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate, between the High and Low Ratio settings.
  • <HIGH RATIO>: A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a low quality.
  • <LOW RATIO>: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a high quality.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (Scan to File Server)

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RETRY TIMES>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to enter the number of retry attempts (0 to 5 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can change and store the Standard Send Settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  1. Each time you set the desired setting item, press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT STANDARD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select [ON], then press [OK].

To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [] or [] to select <OFF>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Send Settings (Scan to File Server)

You can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the file server address.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)".

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select file format for <FILE FORMAT>, then press [OK].

File server (FTP and SMB): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

If you have selected <JPEG> in step 5, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format.

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality for <IMAGE QUALITY>, then press [OK].

File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>

  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected.
  • If <JPEG> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, or <150X150dpi> can be selected.
  • If <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400X400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, or <200X100dpi> can be selected.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type for <ORIGINAL TYPE>, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 5, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 9.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server

You can enter the name of the document that you want to send.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX FILE NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the document's name (24 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Message (Scan to File Server)

You can enter the message body text of the document that you want to send. Messages entered here are sent as a text file.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MESSAGE TEXT>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the message body text (140 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server)

If you are sending to a file server destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COLOR TX GAMMA>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

<GAMMA 1.8>, <GAMMA 2.2>,< GAMMA 1.0>, <GAMMA 1.4>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).

  • Decreasing the sharpness

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.

  • Increasing the sharpness

You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SHARPNESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the sharpness (1 - 7), then press [OK].

Each time you press [] , the sharpness is decreased. Each time you press [], the sharpness is increased.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Changing the Status of Scanning Data (Scan to File Server)

The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status of the send jobs currently being processed.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the job log does not appear in the display.

Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server)

Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server)


Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can check the status of scanning documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].

If you select a document with the message <TX STNDBY> or <TX TRM...>, skip to step 5.

  1. If you want to delete the document, press [] or [] to select <CANCEL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server)

Return to Overview

You can print the results of scanning transactions. TX REPORT and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually.


  • TX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.


  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print the first page.
<ON>: Prints the first page.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination fax number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call

  • ACTIVITY REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <AUTO PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.


  1. Confirm that <TX/RX SEPARATE> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.
<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/address
  • NO.: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed

If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually.



Scanning Documents to a Computer

Instructions for scanning documents to your computer directly connected with a USB cable. Make sure that the scanner driver is installed. For instructions on how to install the software, see "USB Connection."



Overview of Scanner Functions

This machine enables you to scan documents to your computer.



System Requirements (Scan)

Instructions for the system environments with which the machine is compatible.


Remark
  • The USB 2.0 Hi Speed connection requires a PC equipped with a CPU higher than Intel® Pentium® ll, more than 128 MB of RAM, and with Windows Vista, Windows XP service pack released later than SP1 or Windows 2000 SP4 installed. If your PC meets all of these requirements and is preinstalled with USB 2.0 Host Controller, the USB 2.0 connection will be guaranteed.

  • General
  • IBM or IBM-compatible PC
  • PC equipped with a USB port and the USB class driver installed
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium® 133 MHz or higher (USB 1.1), Intel® Pentium® II or higher (USB 2.0)
  • Memory: 128 MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® 300 MHz or higher (USB 1.1), Intel® Pentium® II or higher (USB 2.0)
  • Memory: 128 MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • CPU: Intel® Pentium® 800MHz or faster
  • Memory: 512MB or more


Where to Find Help (Scan)

When you encounter a problem during installation of the driver software or while operating your machine, consult the following:


  • In This Manual

See "Troubleshooting."

  • In the Basic Operation Guide

See "Troubleshooting."

  • Readme.txt File

The hints, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when using the ScanGear and iR Toolbox are included in the Readme.txt file provided with these programs.



Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a Computer

This section describes the basic procedure for scanning documents to your computer.


Remark
  • Make sure that the scanner driver is installed.For instructions on how to install the software, see "USB Connection."

Scanning with [Start] on the Machine

Canceling Scanning Documents to a Computer

Scanning with the iR Toolbox


Scanning with [Start] on the Machine

Return to Overview

You can scan documents and transmit the scanned data to your computer using the operation panel of the machine.


Remark
  • Your machine must be connected via USB and the USB scanner driver must be loaded to scan. This machine does not support network scanning.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SCAN] on the machine.

The SCAN indicator lights up and the machine enters the scan standby mode.

  1. Press [Start] on the machine.

If you are asked to select a program to launch, select "iR Toolbox Ver4.9". The scanned document will be processed according to your settings.

When scanning is completed, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder. (In VISTA, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.)



Canceling Scanning Documents to a Computer

During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed on the computer screen.

  1. Press [Stop] on the operation panel.
  1. Click [OK] on the computer screen.


Scanning with the iR Toolbox

Return to Overview

You can scan a document using the buttons on the iR Toolbox.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon to open the iR Toolbox.

You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Click one of the scanning buttons.

[Mail]: The document will be scanned and attached to an e-mail message in your e-mail application.

[OCR]: The text will be scanned and read by the OCR software.

[Save]: The document will be scanned and saved.

[PDF]: The text will be scanned and saved as a PDF file.

[Scan-1], [Scan-2]: The text will be scanned and appear in the registered application. You can change the button name by directly entering a new name (up to 8 characters long) over the button name.

A dialog box appears for each of the buttons.

Example: [Mail] dialog box

  1. Specify the required settings.

For details, see "iR Toolbox Settings."

If you want to keep the same settings for future scans, click [Apply] before clicking [Start].

  • With [Scan-1] and [Scan-2] buttons, you can set the different settings for each. If you save the settings by clicking [Apply], the settings will be effective next time.
  1. Click [Start].

If you select [Display the Scanner Driver] in step 4, the [ScanGear iR] dialog box will appear.

  1. Specify the required settings.

For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR."

  1. Click [Scan].

When scanning is completed, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder. (In Windows Vista, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.)

If you have applications registered to the [Mail], [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1], or [Scan-2] buttons, the scanned image will be displayed in the application or attached to an e-mail message after scanning. For details, see "External Program (Mail Program)."

For some models, the CD-ROM provided with the machine contains the following applications which can be used with the iR Toolbox. They will be registered in the iR Toolbox buttons at the time of installation.

[OCR]: ScanSoft OmniPage SE

[PDF]: Presto! PageManager

  • ScanSoft OmniPage and Presto! PageManager are not supported on Windows XP 64-bit version.


Scanning an Image from an Application

Return to Overview

You can scan an image from a TWAIN- or WIA- (Windows XP/Vista Only) compliant application and use the image in that application. The following is an example of the procedure.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Open the application you want to use.
  1. Select the command to scan.
  1. Select the scanner driver to be used.

With Windows XP/Vista, you can use the ScanGear iR or the WIA driver as the scanner driver.

  1. Specify the scanner settings → click [Scan].

For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR," or "Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Windows Vista Only)."



Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Windows Vista Only)

Return to Overview

  • Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] Dialog Box (Windows XP Only)

  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder.

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras].


  1. Double-click the corresponding WIA driver icon.

  1. Click [Next >].

  1. Select a picture type.

You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom]. When selecting [Custom], click [Custom settings] to make detailed settings in the [Properties] dialog box.


  1. Select the paper source.

You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder].


  1. Specify the scanned area.

If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag to specify the scanned area.

If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size from the drop-down list.


  1. Click [Next >].

  1. Specify a name, a file format, and the location for saving the group of pictures.

  • When you save more than one picture in the same location, sequential numbers are automatically added at the ends of file names.
  • You can select a file format from [BMP (Bitmap Image)], [JPG (JPEG Image)], [TIF (TIF Image)], and [PNG (PNG Image)].

  1. Click [Next] to start scanning.


  1. Click [Next].

If you want to publish these pictures to a Web site or order printouts online, select the corresponding option.


  1. Click [Finish].

  • Scanning from the [Windows FAX and Scan] Dialog Box (Windows Vista Only)

Depending on the edition of your Windows Vista, this function may not be supported.


  1. Open the [Windows FAX and Scan] dialog box.

Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scan a document or picture] in [Scanners and Cameras].


  1. Click [New Scan] to open the [New Scan] dialog box.

You can open it also from the [File] menu by selecting [New] → [Scan].


  1. Make sure the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed on [Scanner].

If you want to use other scanners, click [Change] and select a desired scanner driver icon.


  1. Specify required scan settings.

For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box."


  1. Click [Scan].

It starts scanning. Scanned image displays on [Windows Fax and Scan].

When you scan more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names and the image files are saved in the [Scanned Documents] folder in the [Documents] folder.

Renaming the image file is available afterward.


  • Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery (Windows Vista Only)

  1. Open the [Windows Photo Gallery].

Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [All programs] → [Windows Photo Gallery].


  1. Open the [Import Pictures and Videos] dialog box.

Select [Import from Camera or Scanner] from the [File] menu.


  1. Double-click the corresponding scanner driver icon.

Or select a corresponding scanner driver icon then press [Import].


  1. Make sure the corresponding scanner driver is displayed on [Scanner].

If you want to use other scanners, click [Change] and select a desired scanner driver icon.


  1. Specify required scan settings.

For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box."


  1. Click [Scan].

You can classify the scanned image by typing a tag in [Tag these pictures (optional):].

If you save the scanned image without typing the tag, it will be saved in a new folder created under the [pictures] folder, named by its scan date.


  1. Click [import].

When you save more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names. Renaming the image file is available afterward.


You can specify detailed settings for each scan.

[Scanner]: The corresponding scanner driver is displayed. Click [Change] to select a desired scanner driver icon.

[Profile]: Selects the use for the scanned image from [Add profile], [Last used settings], [Document], and [Photo (Default)].

  • If you select [Last used settings], the settings previously used are recalled.
  • If you select [Add profile...], you can save new profiles from the [Add New Profile] dialog box.
  • To delete or edit added profiles, click [Delete] or [Edit] in the [Scan Profiles] dialog box in the [Scanners and Cameras] folder.

[Source]: Selects from [Flatbed] (Platen glass) or [Feeder (Scan one side)].

  • If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag to specify the scanned area. If you have selected [Feeder (Scan one side)] as the paper source, select the page size from the [Paper size].

[Color format]: Selects the scanning color type from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], or [Black and white picture or text].

[File type]: Selects a file format from [BMP (Bitmap Image)], [JPG (JPEG Image)], [TIF (TIF Image)], and [PNG (PNG Image)].

[Resolution (DPI)]: Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600).

[Brightness]: Specifies the brightness (-100 to 100).

[Contrast]: Specifies the contrast (-100 to 100) (only for color or grayscale scanning).

  • Scanning from an Application (Windows XP/Windows Vista Only)

With the WIA driver dialog box open, follow the procedure below. On how to display the WIA driver, see "Scanning an Image from an Application."


  1. Select the paper source.

You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder].


  1. Select the picture type.

You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom Settings].


  1. If necessary, click [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture].

The [Advanced Properties] dialog box appears.


  1. Adjust the quality of the image → click [OK].

For details on the settings, see "Advanced Properties."


  1. Specify the scanned area.

If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag to specify the scanned area.

If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size in [Page size].


  1. Click [Scan].

[Appearance]: Shows the preview of sample image.

[Brightness]: Specifies the brightness (-127 to 127).

[Contrast]: Specifies the contrast (-127 to 127) (only for color or grayscale scanning).

[Resolution (DPI)]: Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600).

[Picture type]: Selects the scanning color type ([Color picture], [Grayscale picture], or [Black and white picture or text]).

[Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • The setting items and default values in the [Advanced Properties] tab vary depending on the type of picture you select.


Setting the Scanning Function for [Start]

When you scan for the first time using [Start] on the machine, scanning will start in the same way as when you click [Save] in the iR Toolbox. By following procedure below you can change the set for scanning function on each of iR Toolbox or other applications when you press [Start].


Setting Up [Start] to Operate in a Different Way from [Save]

Setting Up [Start] in the [Settings] Dialog Box

Setting Up [Start] in the [Scanners and Cameras] Folder


Setting Up [Start] to Operate in a Different Way from [Save]

Return to Overview

  1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon to open the iR Toolbox.

You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Drag the mark over the button you want to select.

The mark will be displayed above the button you select.



Setting Up [Start] in the [Settings] Dialog Box

Return to Overview


In the iR Toolbox, click [Settings] to open the [Settings] dialog box. From the drop-down list, select the scanning function you want to link [Start] to, then click [OK].



Setting Up [Start] in the [Scanners and Cameras] Folder

Return to Overview

  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder (Windows 2000: the [Scanners and Cameras Properties] dialog box).

Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. (Windows Vista: [start] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scanners and Cameras]. Windows 2000: [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras Properties].)

  1. Click the corresponding scanner driver icon.
  1. Select [Properties] from the [File] menu. (Windows 2000/Vista: Click [Properties].)

  1. Specify an action for [Start].

On Windows XP/Vista:

Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Select an event] → select the operation for [Start this program] in [Actions] → click [OK].

On Windows 2000:

Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Scanner events] → select the operation for [Start] in [Send to this application] → click [OK].

  • If the settings you specified in the scanner property dialog box do not work immediately, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable, or restart your computer.


iR Toolbox Settings

Example: [Mail] dialog box


Scanner Settings

Save Scanned Image to

External Program (Mail Program)

Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image)


Scanner Settings

Return to Overview


You can specify the scanning mode, resolution, document size, and file size of the scanned image.

[Select Source]: Selects where the document is placed ([Platen Glass], [ADF], or [Auto Mode]).

  • When [Auto Mode] is selected, the document in the ADF isvautomatically scanned. If there is no document in the ADF, the document on the platen glass will be scanned.

[Input Method]: Specifies if the document to be scanned is 1-sided or 2-sided. You cnnot select this item when [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].

  • This setting is not available for models without ADF.

[Paper Size]: Selects the size of the document to be scanned. Selecting [Custom] opens the [Paper Size Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the custom paper size. When scanning using the [Save], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2] buttons and [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source], you can also scan large size documents by selecting [Stitch-assist (11" x 17")], [Stitch-assist (A3)] or [Stitch-assist (Platen x 2)]. (See "Scanning a Large Document.")

[Orientation]: Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the document. When [2-sided] is selected in [Input Method], select also the binding location of the document. This button is disabled when [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].

(Original Orientation): Shows the direction of scanning paper. The icon display varies depending on the settings for [Select Source], [Paper Size], and [Orientation].

  • This setting is not available for models without ADF.

[Scan Mode]: Selects the scan mode. The scan modes you can select differ depending on the iR Toolbox button you press.

  • [Black and White]: Scans document as a black and white image.
  • [Black and White (OCR)]: Scans document as a black and white image for OCR software.
  • [Grayscale]: Scans document as a grayscale image (similar to a monochrome picture).
  • [Color]: Scans document as a color image.
  • [Color (Magazine)]: Scans document as a color image with the Descreen function, which enables you to reduce the moiré when scanning printed photographs and pictures.

[Upper Limit of Attached File]: Selects an approximateupper size limit (after compression) for the image you will send. For an ordinary mail message, [150 KB] is recommended. You can specify this item when scanning using the [Mail] button and [JPEG/Exif] is selected in [Save as Type].

[Image Quality]: Selects the scan quality (resolution). When scanning using the [Mail] button, the resolution you can select depends on the setting in [Upper Limit of Attached File].

[Display the Scanner Driver]: If you select this check box, all items in the [Scanner Settings] become invalid, and when [Start] is clicked the [ScanGear iR] dialog box appears and enables you to make advanced settings for scanning. This check box is not available when scanning using the [OCR] button.



Save Scanned Image to

Return to Overview


You can specify the file name, file format, and location to save the scanned image. If you select PDF as a file format, you can also specify the detailed settings for the PDF file.

[File Name]: Enter a file name for the scanned image. If you save another file with the same name, four digits starting from 0001 will be attached after the file name.

[Save as Type]: Specifies the file type to save the scanned image.

  • [BMP]: Bitmap format.
  • [JPEG/Exif]: JPEG/Exif format. This option is available when [Grayscale], [Color] or [Color (Magazine)] is selected in [Scan Mode].
  • [TIFF]: TIFF format.
  • [PDF]: PDF format.
  • [PDF (Add Page)]: Adds the scanned image to the last page of an existing PDF file that was created with the iR Toolbox.
  • The type of file which can be saved with each button is shown below.

      BMP JPEG/Exif TIFF PDF PDF
    (Multiple
    Pages)
    PDF
    (Add Page)
    [Mail]
    [OCR]
    [Save]
    [PDF]
    [Scan-1],
    [Scan-2]
  • When [PDF], [PDF (Multiple Pages)], or [PDF (Add Page)] is selected and if an error message appears indicating that the image size is too large, reduce the data size of the scanned image. (See "Output Settings.")

[PDF Settings]: Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file. (See "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages.")

[Save Scanned Image to]: Shows the location to save the scanned images. To change the location, click [Browse] → select a folder → click [OK].

[Add Scanned Image to]: This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image.

[Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date]: Select this check box to create a folder with current date (e.g. 2008-06-30) in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder.



External Program (Mail Program)

Return to Overview


When scanning using the [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2] buttons, you can specify an application to be used to display the scanned image. Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [Open]. You can also specify an application by dragging and dropping the application icon onto the dialog box.

When scanning using the [Mail] button, you can specify an e-mail software to which you want to attach the scanned image. The iR Toolbox is compatible with e-mail software such as Outlook Express, Microsoft Outlook, Microsoft Exchange, EUDORA, Netscape Messenger and Windows Mail (Vista only). Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [OK].

If [None (Attach Manually)] is displayed, you have to attach the image file manually.



Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image)

Return to Overview


You can preview the scanned images as thumbnail images, and specify the file type and location to save them.

  • You cannot use this function when scanning with the [OCR] button.
  • For the [PDF] button, you can only confirm the scanned image and specify the location to save the image.

Select [Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings] (for the [PDF] button, [Confirm the Scanned Image]) → click [Start]. When the scanning is complete, the thumbnail of the scanned image is displayed.

Confirm the thumbnail image → specify the file type and location → press [Save] or [Forward].

[Save as Type]: Specifies the file type to save the scanned image. The available file types are the same as those listed in "Save Scanned Image to."

[Exif Settings]: Opens the [Exif Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the Exif information when [JPEG/EXIF] is selected in [Save as Type]. (See "Exif Settings.")

[PDF Settings]: Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file. (See "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages.") This button appears when [PDF], [PDF (Multiple Pages)] or [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type].

[Save Scanned Image to]: Specifies the location to save the scanned image.

[Add Scanned Image to]: This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image.

[Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date]: Select this check box to create a folder with current date in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder. This check box is not available when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type].

[Save]: Press to save the scanned images in the specified location.

[Forward]: This button appears instead of [Save] when an application is specified in the [Mail Program] or the [External Program] setting. You can forward the scanned images to the application.

[Cancel]: Cancels the operation and returns to the previous window. Deletes all the images scanned in the operation.



You can attach extra information in the EXIF format, such as the description of the image, the date when the image was scanned, etc., to the JPEG files. Select a scanned image from the drop-down list to view and add information for the image.

[Basic Information]: Displays the information automatically acquired by scanning.

[Advanced Information]: Displays the extra information you enter.

[Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically]: Select this check box to use the same values you have specified in the previous scanning operation.



Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages

You can scan two or more pages and make them into one PDF file.

  1. Set your originals.
  1. Double-click the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon on the Windows desktop to open the iR Toolbox.

You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Click [PDF].
  1. Select [PDF (Multiple Pages)] in [Save as Type].
  1. Specify other required settings → click [PDF Settings].

The [PDF Settings] dialog box appears.

  1. Specify the required settings → click [OK].

[Create Searchable PDF]: Converts the characters in the document to text data and makes the PDF document searchable with keywords.

[Text Language]: Select the language of the text to be scanned. The characters may be recognized more accurately if you select [English] from this drop-down list and set [Image Quality] to [300 dpi] or higher in [Scanner Settings]. (See "Scanner Settings.")

[PDF Compression]: Select [High] for color images such as photos or illustrations to be further compressed, reducing the file size.

  1. Click [Start].

When you set the document on the platen glass, the following dialog box appears as each page is scanned.

To continue to scan, place the next page and click [Next]. When scanning is completed, click [Finish].



Scanning a Large Document

You can scan a document larger than the platen glass by combining pieces scanned separately.


Remark
  • This feature is available only when scanning using the [Save], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2] buttons, and [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].
  1. Set your original on the platen glass.
  1. Double-click the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon on the Windows desktop to open the iR Toolbox.

You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9].

  1. Click [Save], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2].
  1. Select [Stitch-assist (11" x 17")], [Stitch-assist (A3)] or [Stitch-assist (Platen x 2)] in [Paper Size].
  1. Specify the required settings → click [OK].

The [Stitch-assist] wizard dialog box appears.

  1. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan the left side and the right side of the document separately.
  1. Adjust the position of the right side of the scanned image for synthesis → click [Next].

To make adjustment, click the image and move it using the arrow keys on the keyboard. You can also move the image by dragging it.

  1. Specify the scan area with a corpping frame.

Any blank areas inside the cropping frame will be saved as white background.

  1. Click [OK], [Save] or [Forward].


Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR

The ScanGear iR enables you to preview the image to be scanned and make detailed adjustments for the image. To use the ScanGear iR, select [Display the Scanner Driver] in the iR Toolbox, or scan from an application.


Remark
  • You cannot preview the image when using the ADF.

Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode

Using Simple Mode

Using Advanced Mode

Specifying the Parameters of a Scan

Advanced Mode Settings

Determining Resolution


Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode

Return to Overview


The ScanGear iR has two modes: [Simple Mode] and [Advanced Mode]. With [Advanced Mode] you can perform detailed settings such as resolution and contrast.

To switch between two modes, click the corresponding tab.


Remark
  • 2-sided scanning is available with [Advanced Mode] only.


Using Simple Mode

Return to Overview


  1. Set documents.
  1. Select the document type in [Select Source].

[Photo (Color)]: To scan color photos.

[Magazine (Color)]: To scan color magazines with the Descreen function.

[Newspaper (B&W)]: To scan text and line drawings.

[Document (Grayscale)]: To scan color images or text in monochrome. Appropriate for scanning high-resolution monochrome images.

[Document (Color) ADF]: To scan color documents on the ADF.

[Document (Grayscale) ADF]: To scan Grayscale documents on the ADF.

If you select [Document (Color) ADF] or [Document (Grayscale) ADF], skip to step 4.

  • On how to turn off the automatic color correction for the document type other than [Newspaper (B&W)], see "[Color Settings] Tab."
  • [Document (Color) ADF] and [Document (Grayscale) ADF] are not available for models without ADF.
  1. Click [Preview].

A preview of the scanned image appears in the preview window.

  1. Select the use for the scanned image in [Select Purpose].

You can select from [Print (300 dpi)], [Image display (150 dpi)], or [OCR (300 dpi)], depending on the document type you selected in step 2. For details, see "Determining Resolution."

  1. Select the output size of the scanned image in [Output Size].

The options you can select vary depending on what you selected in step 4.

Click to switch the orientation of the output size (landscape or portrait).

  1. Adjust the cropping frame and select the [Fading Correction] check box as needed.

To adjust the cropping frame, click (Auto Crop) or drag the corner or edge of the frame. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

  • The [Fading Correction] check box can be selected only when scanning color documents.
  • When the preview image is not displayed, the [Fading Correction] check box is disabled.
  1. Click [Scan].

  • Add/Delete the Output Size

Selecting [Add/Delete] for [Output Size] opens the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to add and delete the custom output size.

[Purpose]: Selects the use for the scanned image from [Print] or [Image Display]. This setting is available with [Advanced Mode] only.

[Output Size Name]: Specifies the output size name you want to register.

[Width]: Specifies the width of the output size.

[Height]: Specifies the height of the output size.

[Unit]: Selects the unit of measurement for the output size.

[Add]: Adds the specified output size to the [Output Size List].

[Delete]: Deletes the selected output size from the [Output Size List].

[Save]: Saves added or deleted output sizes.

  • Simple Mode Toolbar

(Auto Crop): Crops the image automatically. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

(Remove Cropping Frame): Removes the selected cropping frames.

(Left Rotate): Rotates the image 90 degrees left.

(Right Rotate): Rotates the image 90 degrees right.

(Information): Lists the scanning information.



Using Advanced Mode

Return to Overview


  1. Set documents.
  1. Select settings for [Favorite Settings], [Input Settings], [Output Settings] and [Image Settings], and adjust the color settings.

For details on the settings, see "Advanced Mode Settings."

If you select [ADF (1-sided)] or [ADF (2-sided)] in [Original Input Method], skip to step 4.

  • [ADF (1-sided)] and [ADF (2-sided)] are not available for models without ADF.
  1. Click [Preview].
  • Selecting the range in the preview window and clicking [Zoom] reloads the selected image to be enlarged.
  • To delete the displayed preview image, click .
  1. If you want to scan only part of the document, specify the parameters.

For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

  1. Click [Scan].
  • Advanced Mode Toolbar

(Clear): Deletes the preview image from the preview area. It also resets the toolbar settings and color settings.

(Crop): Specifies the parameter of a scan.

(Move): Moves the enlarged image on the screen.

(Zoom): Enlarges or reduces the preview image. Click on the image to zoom in, and right-click on the image to zoom out.

(Left Rotate): Rotates the image 90 degrees left.

(Right Rotate): Rotates the image 90 degrees right.

(Information): Lists the scanning information.

(Auto Crop): Crops the image automatically. For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan."

(Remove Cropping Frame): Removes the selected cropping frames.

[Select All Crops]: When this button is used, all the cropping frames reflect the settings made on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet.

[Zoom]: Click this button to rescan the focal cropping area of the preview image at a higher level of magnification. Once clicked, this button changes into [Undo]. The image retunes to its original size by clicking [Undo].



Specifying the Parameters of a Scan

Return to Overview


You can create scan areas (cropping areas) for images shown in the preview area. When you click [Scan], only the cropped area will be scanned.


Remark
  • Crop feature is invalid when [ADF (2-sided)] is selected in [Original Input Method] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet.

  • Selecting the Cropping Area Automatically

After previewing, click (Auto Crop) on the toolbar. Clicking this button enables you to gradually crop off the image outside the borders detected in the preview image.

  • Creating a Cropping Frame

Select (Crop) on the toolbar, click on the preview image and drag over the area you wish to select. To make further adjustments, drag the corner or edge of the selected frame or enter the desired parameter values for (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet. To move the cropping frame you have selected, click inside the cropping frame and drag.

  • To maintain the current width and height proportion of the image, click in [Input Settings].
  • When using the ADF, creating a new cropping frame will erase an existing one.
  • Creating Multiple Cropping Frames (Only when Using the Platen Glass)

You can create another cropping frame even if there is already one in the preview area. Click and drag the mouse cursor outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in that area.

You can create up to 10 cropping areas. By clicking [Scan] once, all the cropped areas will be scanned. (Scanning will continue until all selected areas have been scanned.)

The most recently created cropping frame will become the focal point. To make adjustments to previously created cropping frames, select the frame or frames by clicking on them.

  • Deleting Cropping Frames

If you want to remove cropping frames, select the frame or frames and do one of the following:

  • Click [Delete] on the keyboard.
  • Click (Remove Cropping Frame) on the toolbar.
  • Right-click on the cropped area and select [Delete].
  • Hold down [Ctrl] on the keyboard, right-click outside the cropped area, and select [Delete].


Advanced Mode Settings

Return to Overview



  • Favorite Settings

Favorite Settings enables you to save a set of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, Color Settings and Preferences) made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved. You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area.


Remark
  • The following items cannot be saved in Favorite Settings:
  • Values of (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings] and in [Output Settings]
  • Activation of button (maintaining the proportion of width and height) in [Input Settings]
  • Value of [%] (Scale) in [Output Settings]

[User Defined]:

When this option is selected, specify a value for each setting.

[Default]:

Restores the default settings. The preview image will be cleared.

[Add/Delete]:

Opens the [Add/Delete Favorite Settings] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of settings for the current preview image. [Add/Delete] is not displayed when there is no preview image.

  • Input Settings

[Original Input Method]:

Selects where the document is placed from [Platen Glass], [ADF (1-sided)] or [ADF (2-sided)].

  • If you change this setting after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
  • [ADF (1-sided)] and [ADF (2-sided)] are not available for models without ADF.

[Input Size]:

Selects the size of the original document.

  • If you change this setting after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
  • When the document is loaded in the ADF, select the paper size from [A5 Portrait], [A5 Landscape], [A4], [Letter] and [Legal].
  • When [ADF (2-sided)] is selected in [Original Input Method], if the size specified in [Input Size] is different from the actual paper size, the scanning results may differ between the two sides of the page.

(Original Orientation):

Shows the direction of the document being scanned. The icon display varies depending on the settings for [Original Input Method], [Input Size], and [Orientation].

[Orientation]:

Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the original document. When [ADF (2-sided)] is selected in [Original Input Method], select also the binding location of the original document.

(Width):

Specifies the width of the input size.

(Height):

Specifies the height of the input size.

  • Some applications have a limit to the amount of image data they can receive. If the parameters of a scan contain more than 21,000 x 30,000 pixels, the image will not be received.
  • When [Output Resolution] is set to [600] dpi, minimum parameters of an image are 96 x 96 pixels.
  • To maintain the current width and height proportions of the image, click .
  • [Orientation] is not available for models without ADF.

[Color Mode]:

Selects the type of document and the way in which it is scanned.

  • [Black and White]: To output documents to a monochrome printer. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold values) into black and white and is displayed in two colors. For the threshold setting, see "Color Settings."
  • [Grayscale]: To scan black and white photos or monochrome images. The image is expressed in a 0-255 scale of black and white.
  • [Color]: To scan color photos. The image is expressed in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen) and B(lue).
  • [Color (Documents)]: To scan color documents that include texts or charts in addition to color photos. The image is expressed in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen) and B(lue).
  • [Text Enhanced]: To scan texts crisply, particularly to process it with OCR software. The image is displayed in black and white.
  • Output Settings

[Output Resolution]:

Specifies the resolution for the scan. You can select a resolution from the drop-down list, or enter any value between 25-9600 dpi. If you are using the ADF, enter a resolution between 25-600 dpi. For details, see "Determining Resolution."

[Output Size]:

Selects the output size of the scanned image. If you select [Add/Delete], the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box will appear and you can add and delete the custom output size (see "Add/Delete the Output Size.") If [Flexible] is selected, enter values in (Width), (Height) or [%] (Scale). The resolution when you actually scan will change in accordance with the value of [%]. The ratio of (Width) and (Height) is linked to (Width) and (Height) in [Input Settings]. You can enter the value for [%] between 25 and 38400, but the upper limit varies depending on the value of [Output Resolution]. Click to switch the orientation of the output size (landscape or portrait). This button is invalid when [Flexible] is selected.

[Data Size]:

Shows the data size of the scanned image according to your settings.

  • Image Settings

[Auto Tone]:

Set to [ON] to automatically adjust the tone of the image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.

  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode], and [Color Correction] is set to [Recommended] or [Color Matching] in the [Preferences] dialog box.

[Unsharp Mask]:

Set to [ON] to emphasize the outline of an image and make it sharper. It is effective for scanning photos etc., which have a soft focus.

  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

[Descreen]:

Set to [ON] to reduce the distorted pattern (moiré) when scanning printed photographs and pictures.

  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • Even if [Descreen] is set to [ON], some moiré effect may remain if [Unsharp Mask] is also set to [ON]. In this case, disable [Unsharp Mask].
  • A change in this setting is reflected after [Scan] is clicked.

[Reduce Dust and Scratches]:

Reduces the dust and scratches on photos.

  • [None]: No reduction of dust and scratches will be made.
  • [Low]: Reduces only small dust and scratch marks.
  • [Medium]: Normally this setting is recommended.
  • [High]: Reduces large dust and scratch marks. This may remove delicate parts of the image.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode], and [Color Correction] is set to [Recommended] in the [Preferences] dialog box (see "[Color Settings] Tab.")

[Fading Correction]:

Rebuilds the color quality that has faded over time. It also increases saturation of dullcolored originals to reproduce a vivid image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.

  • [None]: No fading correction will be made.
  • [Low]: Corrects slightly faded images.
  • [Medium]: Normally this setting is recommended.
  • [High]: Corrects highly faded images. This may change the tone of the image.
  • This setting is available when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode], and [Color Correction] is set to [Recommended] in the [Preferences] dialog box.

[Grain Correction]:

Smoothes out the film grain of the image recorded on fast film. The result is smoother tones and higher overall quality.

  • [None]: No grain correction will be made.
  • [Low]: Select this setting when the grain in the picture is not so notable.
  • [Medium]: Normally this setting is recommended.
  • [High]: Smoothes out even very notable grain in the picture. This may lower the image sharpness and tonal quality.
  • This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • This setting is not reflected in the preview image.
  • Color Settings

Using Color Settings buttons, you can adjust the brightness and contrast of the whole image, specify highlights and shadows, and adjust the contrast and balance in an image.

The buttons displayed differ depending on your selection in [Color Mode]. When [Text Enhanced] is selected, no Color Settings button is displayed.

When [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]:

When [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]:

By selecting [Add/Delete] from the drop-down list, you can name and save a set of color settings. For details, see "Tone Curve/Threshold Drop-Down List."

Clicking a button opens the dialog box for each color setting. If [Reset] is clicked, all color settings will be reset to the default values.

  • Brightness/Contrast

This dialog box enables you to adjust the levels of brightness and contrast of the image. Click to adjust the brightness and contrast diagrammatically.



[Channel]:

Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

[Brightness]:

Adjust the brightness of the image by moving the slider or entering values (-127 to 127).

[Contrast]:

Adjust the contrast of the image by moving the slider or entering values (-127 to 127).

[Reset]:

Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Histogram

This dialog box enables you to see the data concentration at each brightness level in an image. You can specify the darkest and brightest levels within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.

[Channel]:

Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

(Black-point eyedropper tool):

Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0 to 245) or move the slider to an appropriate level.

(Mid-point eyedropper tool):

Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the midtone point. You can also enter a value (5 to 250) or move the slider to an appropriate level.

(White-point eyedropper tool):

Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the highlighted point. You can also enter a value (10 to 255) or move the slider to an appropriate level.

(Gray Balance eyedropper tool):

When adjusting a color image, click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the point to execute gray balance adjustment. The gray elements within a scanned image will appear as a neutral gray, and other elements within the image will also have true color reproduction.

[Reset]:

Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Tone Curve Settings

This dialog box enables you to adjust the brightness of a specific area of an image by selecting the type of the tone curve. The tone curve is a graph showing the balance of tone input and output.

[Channel]:

Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

[Select Tone Curve]:

Select the tone curve from [No Correction], [Over Exposure], [Under Exposure], [High Contrast] or [Invert the Negative/Positive Image].

[Reset]:

Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • Final Review

This dialog box enables you to confirm the color settings.

  • Threshold

This dialog box enables you to adjust the threshold. By adjusting the threshold, you can sharpen characters in a text document and reduce back-printing such as in newspapers.

[Threshold Level]:

Adjust the threshold by moving the slider or entering a value (0 to 255).

[Reset]:

Resets all the current settings to their default values.

  • The brightness of color and grayscale images are expressed as a value between 0 and 255 but the brightness of black and white images is expressed in terms of either black or white, including the parts of an image which are a color between the two. The boundary at which black and white is divided is called "threshold."
  • Tone Curve/Threshold Drop-Down List

This drop-down list enables you to save a set of color settings made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved. You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area.

[Custom]:

When this option is selected, specify a value for each color setting. Even after the registered settings are applied, [Custom] resumes automatically if you change any setting or make adjustments to the selected cropping frame.

[Add/Delete]:

Opens the [Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings] dialog box ([Add/Delete Threshold Settings] dialog box, when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]). This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of color settings.

  • [Preferences] Dialog Box

Clicking [Preferences] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet opens the [Preferences] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to adjust settings for scanning and previewing.

  • [Preview] Tab

[Preview at the Start of ScanGear]:

Selects the preview operation when you open the ScanGear iR.

  • [Automatically Execute Preview]: The preview scan starts automatically when you open the ScanGear iR.
  • [Display Saved Preview Image]: Displays the image last previewed.
  • [None]: Nothing is displayed.

[Cropping Frame on Previewed Images]:

Sets how the cropping frame is displayed when you preview images.

  • [Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images]: The image will be automatically cropped to match the document size.
  • [Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images]: Displays the last frame.
  • [None]: No frame will be displayed.
  • [Scan] Tab

[Scan without Using ScanGear's Window]:

Enables you to scan in a specific color mode when using an application that will not display the [ScanGear iR] dialog box (such as OCR software), overriding the application settings.

  • [Color Mode (Text and Table)]: The document is scanned in a mode equivalent to [Color (Documents)] of [Color Mode], regardless of the application settings.
  • [Text Enhanced]: The document is scanned in a mode equivalent to [Text Enhanced] of [Color Mode], regardless of the application settings.

[Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning]:

If selected, the [ScanGear iR] dialog box quits automatically after the image is scanned. Some applications will automatically quit ScanGear iR after scanning irrespective of this setting.

[Color Correction]:

Selects the type of color correction.

  • [Recommended]: Vividly reproduces the tone of a document on the screen.
  • [Color Matching]: Select to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors. If selected, the Color Settings buttons are invalid in the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet. This setting is available when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode].
  • [None]: No color matching is made. This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

[Always Execute the Auto Tone]:

If selected, the image color will always be automatically corrected. This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].

[Monitor Gamma]:

Enables you to perform gamma correction. Specify the gamma value (0.10 to 10.00) of the monitor for viewing the scanned image. This setting is not reflected in the scanning result when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode].

  • [Monitor Gamma] value will be fixed to 1.80 when [Color Matching] is selected in [Color Correction].

  • [Scanner] Tab

[Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved]: Click [Browse] and specify the folder in which the files are saved.

[Sound Settings]:

Sets the scanner to play music during scanning or play a sound when scanning is completed. You can specify the following files: MIDI files (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi), Audio files (*.wav, *.aiff, *.aif), MP3 file (*.mp3).

  • [Play Music During Scanning]: If selected, the scanner plays music during scanning. Click [Browse], then specify a sound file.
  • [Play Sound When Scanning is Completed]: If selected, the scanner plays sound when scanning is completed. Click [Browse], then specify a sound file.

[Test Scanner]:

Opens the [Scanner Diagnostics] dialog box, which enables you to confirm normal operation of the scanner. Check that the power cord is plugged in, and the USB cable is connected between the machine and your computer, then click [Start].



Determining Resolution

Return to Overview


The data in the image you scan is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution" and "dpi" (dots per inch) refers to the number of dots in one inch. You can specify a resolution in [Image Quality] in the iR Toolbox settings dialog box, or in [Output Resolution] in the ScanGear iR.

  • Images for Display on a Monitor

Images for display on a monitor in general should be scanned at a resolution of 75 dpi.

  • Images for Printing

Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution which corresponds to the resolution of the printer.

  • With a color printer, the colors are expressed as a certain percentage of ink pigment so scanning your document at half the resolution of the printer should be fine.

  • Printing Scale

For example, if you want to print a document which is twice the original size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of your document will be reduced by half. In such a case, scan the original document at double the resolution so that you can print the document with sufficient quality, even if you double the size of the document. Conversely, if you want to print a document at a reduced size, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.

  • Resolution and Data Size

If you double the resolution, the image data will be four times greater. If the data is too large, processing speed will slow down significantly, and you may experience malfunctions such as lack of memory. Make sure the resolution corresponds to the planned use of the image and set it at the lowest level possible.



E-Mail

This category describes the things that you must do before using e-mail functions.
This category describes also the settings and procedures for sending e-mails.
E-mail functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.



Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipient's e-mail application.
This section describes the things that you must do before using e-mail functions.
Be sure to set the following items first:

  • Network settings

Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")

  • E-Mail settings

Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax.")



Basic Methods for Sending E-Mails

This section describes the flow of sending e-mails.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].

The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].
  • If you want to send color images attached to an e-mail message, select <E-MAIL (COLOR)>.
  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)."

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format, then press [OK].

E-Mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>

E-Mail (Color): <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>

  • If you specify an e-mail address from Address Book without selecting the sending method, settings specified in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> in <COMMON SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS> are displayed.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format.

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x100dpi>

E-Mail (Color): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>

  • If <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400X400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, or <200X100dpi> can be selected.
  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected for sending color images attached to an e-mail message.
  • If <JPEG> is selected as the file format, <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, or <150X150dpi> can be selected for sending color images attached to an e-mail message.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 6, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 10.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary.

You can set the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address, and e-mail priority common to all sending jobs. For instructions, "Optional Settings for an E-Mail."



Canceling Send E-Mail Documents

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

  1. Press [Stop].
  1. When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message appears, press [OK].

  • When scanning using the ADF:


  • When scanning using the platen glass:

  1. When the <CANCEL DURING TX/RX?> message appears, press [] to select <YES>.
  • For sending jobs, remove any unscanned documents from the ADF.


Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)

This section describes how to specify an e-mail address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book, a one-touch key, or a coded dial code, or specify a new address.


Using Numeric Keys (E-Mail)

Using the Address Book (E-Mail)

Using the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail)

Using Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail)

Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail)

Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail)


Using Numeric Keys (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can specify a new e-mail address.


Remark
  • You can specify only one destination at a time using - and [numeric keys].
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the e-mail address with - and [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong character when specifying an e-mail address, go back to the wrong digit with [], then press [Clear]. Or press and hold [Clear] tp delete the entire entry.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Address Book (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under.


Remark
  • You cannot search for the destinations registered under favorites buttons using [Address Book].
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with the numeric keys.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Address Book].

If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL SEARCH>, then press [OK].

<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name

<ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address

  1. Enter the first letter of the recipient's name or the first part of the address with - and [numeric keys].

For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [] (ABC). Entries starting with the letter you entered are displayed if any entries are registered. Press [Tone] to switch between input modes:

[:A]: Letter mode

[:1]: Number mode

  1. Press [] or [] to search for the recipient.

[]: displays recipients in alphabetical order.

[]: displays recipients in reverse order.

  1. When the recipient's name is displayed, press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.



Using the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key (01 to 23).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Using Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial].
  1. Enter the desired three digit code (000 to 176) with - and [numeric keys].

If you entered a wrong code, press [Clear], then try again from step 3.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.



Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 199 destinations in one group.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.


Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the one-touch key under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail)
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Coded Dial] followed by the three digit code under which the desired address group is registered.

If you pressed a wrong key or code, press [Clear], and perform step 3 again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.


Remark
  • A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified with - and [numeric keys].) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in the group is counted as a separate address.
  • If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

Use - and [numeric keys], one-touch keys, coded dial codes, favorites buttons, or [Address Book] to specify destinations.

  • Only one destination can be specified using - and [numeric keys].
  1. Repeat step 4 to enter all required recipients.
  • If you want to enter an e-mail address using the numeric keys in the middle of the procedure, press [SEND], select <E-MAIL: B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, and then enter the address.
  • To check all the specified destinations, press [] or [] to scroll the display.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Adjusting Density (E-Mail)

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)".

  1. Press [Density].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the density, then press [OK].

[]: to make light documents darker.

[]: to make documents lighter.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Selecting Image Quality (E-Mail)

You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take.


Remark
  • You can also specify the resolution (Image Quality) by pressing [OK] after specifying the destination. For instructions, see "Send Settings (E-Mail)."
 
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)".

  1. Press [Image Quality].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the image quality, then press [OK].

You can also press [Image Quality] repeatedly to select the image quality.

E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>

E-Mail (Color): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>

  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected for sending color images attached to an e-mail message.
  • If you specify an e-mail address from Address Book without selecting the sending method, settings specified in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> in <COMMON SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS> are displayed.
  • If you want to send color images attached to an e-mail message, select <E-MAIL (COLOR)> as a sending method.
  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



2-Sided Originals (E-Mail)

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  1. Specify the destination.

For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)".

  1. Press [2-Sided].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the binding type, then press [OK].

<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation.

<CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Job Recall (E-Mail)

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [Recall].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <1 BEFORE>, <2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that the desired recipient is displayed.

You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.



Favorites Buttons (E-Mail)

You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.

Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail)

Erasing a Favorites Button (E-Mail)

Using the Favorites Buttons (E-Mail)


Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 04), then press [OK].

If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <E-MAIL ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the e-mail address (120 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IMAGE FORMAT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the file format (<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, or <JPEG>), then press [OK].

<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white.

<PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images.

  1. Confirm that <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  • If you have selected <JPEG> as the file format in step 11, multiple images are sent as separate files even if you set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <OFF>.
  1. Confirm that <IMAGEQUALITY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

You can select from <200x200dpi>, <200x400dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, and <200x100dpi>.

  • If you want to send color images in the <PDF (COMPACT)> format, select <300x300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-and-white.
  • If you want to send color images in the <JPEG> format, select <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x200dpi>, or <300x300dpi>. Otherwise, the image is sent in black-andwhite.
  • If you have selected <PDF> or <TIFF (B&W)> as the file format in step 11 and <100X100dpi> or <600X600dpi> as the resolution, the image is sent in <200x200dpi> resolution.
  1. Confirm that <ORIGINAL TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type (<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, or <PHOTO>), then press [OK].
  • If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 11, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 18.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing a Favorites Button (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAVORITES BUTTONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a favorites button (M1 to M4) you want to erase, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to erase the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the e-mail address, the registered name and combination of send settings in a favorites button is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Using the Favorites Buttons (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press the desired one-touch key registered as a favorites button (01 to 04).

If you pressed a wrong key, press [Clear] and try again.

If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5.

  1. Press [OK].

You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).")

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.



Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (E-Mail)

Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step.

  1. Open the one-touch panel.
  1. Press [Delayed TX].
  1. Enter the time you want to start sending using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the time in 24-hour/military time format.
  • Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
  1. Specify the destination.
  1. Press [Start].

The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time.

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • If the document cannot be sent at the time specified for delayed sending due to a temporary power failure (that recovers within an hour), it will be sent at the specified time on the next day.


Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail)

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DATA COMPRESSION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NORMAL>, <HIGH RATIO>, or <LOW RATIO>, then press [OK].
  • <NORMAL>: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate, between the High and Low Ratio settings.
  • <HIGH RATIO>: A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a low quality.
  • <LOW RATIO>: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images are of a high quality.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (E-Mail)

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RETRY TIMES>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to enter the number of retry attempts (0 to 5 times) the machine will make, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format.


Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)


Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can change and store the Standard Send Settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STANDARD SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

  • <DENSITY>: Sets the default density for the document you send (<STANDARD>(standard density), <DK> (darkest) or <LT> (lightest)). (See "Adjusting Density (E-Mail).")
  1. Each time you set the desired setting item, press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT STANDARD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select [ON], then press [OK].

To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [] or [] to select <OFF>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Send Settings (E-Mail)

You can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the e-mail address.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Press [SEND].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <EMAIL: B&W> or <E-MAIL:COLOR>, then press [OK].

If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.

  • If you want to send color images attached to an e-mail message, select <E-MAIL (COLOR)> as a sending method.
  1. Specify the destination.

For details, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)."

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select file format, then press [OK].

E-Mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>
E-Mail (Color): <JPEG>, <PDF (COMPACT)>

  • If you specify an e-mail address from Address Book without selecting the sending method, settings specified in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> in <COMMON SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS> are displayed.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF> for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press [OK].

If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting is not available.
<DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format.

<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
<ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the resolution, then press [OK].

E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x100dpi>
E-Mail (Color): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>

  • If <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected as the file format, only <300x300dpi> can be selected for sending color images attached to an e-mail message.
  1. Press [] or [] to select the original type, then press [OK].

<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO>

If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 6, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 10.

  1. Press [Start].

If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [] or [] to select the original size, then press [Start] for each original. When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start sending.

  • You can set the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address, and e-mail priority common to all sending jobs. (See "Optional Settings for an E-Mail).")


Optional Settings for an E-Mail

You can scan an original and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, reply-to address, and e-mail priority. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.


Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail

Subject/Message (E-Mail)

Reply-to (E-Mail)

E-mail Priority


Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail

Return to Overview

You can enter the name of the document that you want to send.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX FILE NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the document's name (24 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Subject/Message (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can enter a subject of the e-mail message.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SUBJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the subject (40 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MESSAGE TEXT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the message body text (140 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Reply-to (E-Mail)

Return to Overview

You can enter a reply-to address.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPLY-TO>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the reply-to-address (120 characters maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


E-Mail Priority

Return to Overview

You can select the e-mail priority.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is selected, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SEND SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL PRIORITY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the priority (<NORMAL>, <LOW> or <HIGH>), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail)

If you are sending to an e-mail destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COLOR TX GAMMA>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings:

<GAMMA 1.8>, <GAMMA 2.2>,< GAMMA 1.0>, <GAMMA 1.4>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).

  • Decreasing the sharpness

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.

  • Increasing the sharpness

You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SHARPNESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the sharpness (1 - 7), then press [OK].

Each time you press [] , the sharpness is decreased. Each time you press [], the sharpness is increased.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails

This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail documents. If an e-mail transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent.


Remark
  • When sending an e-mail document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending. For information on dividing data before sending it, see "Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails."
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MAX TX DATA SIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to specify the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages (0 to 99 MB), then press [OK].

If the e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails

This function enables you to divide an e-mail document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails."

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DIVIDED OVER MAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select [ON], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking/Changing the Status of E-Mail Documents

The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status of the send jobs currently being processed.


Remark
  • If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, the job log does not appear in the display.

Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents

Printing the E-Mail Log


Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents

Return to Overview

You can check the status of e-mail documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX/TX STATUS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired document, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] to select <YES>.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [] to select <NO>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing the E-Mail Log

Return to Overview

You can print the results of scanning transactions. TX REPORT and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually.


  • TX REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.


  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print the first page.
<ON>: Prints the first page.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination fax number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call

  • ACTIVITY REPORT

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <AUTO PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.


  1. Confirm that <TX/RX SEPARATE> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.
<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/address
  • NO.: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed
  • If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually.


Settings from a PC

This category describes how to set the machine using the Remote UI software.

If you are using the imageRUNNER 1025, an optional network board is required to use the Remote UI functions.

Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.



System Requirements

The Remote UI has been confirmed to work in the following system environments.


Windows

  • OS
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

Macintosh

  • OS
  • Mac OS 10.3 or later, except Mac OS X Classic environment
  • Web Browser
  • Safari 1.3.2 or later


Using the Remote UI

The Remote UI software enables you to access and manage the machine connected to a network using a web browser.

  • Check the machine status from a network computer
  • Set and control the machine from a computer

Starting the Remote UI


Starting the Remote UI

Return to Overview

To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.


Remark
  • Before starting the Remote UI, it is necessary that the IP address of the machine be assigned and <REMOTE UI> in <NETWORK SETINGS> be set to <ON>. Verify the following:
  • Select <VIEW IP ADDRESS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> located in the <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, and verify the IP address of the machine. If you do not know the IP address, consult your network administrator. (See "Confirming IP Address Settings.")
  • If the IP address is not displayed, check if the machine is correctly connected to the computer. For details, see "Set Up Network Connection."
  1. Start the web browser.
  1. Enter the IP address of the machine in [Address] or [Location] → press [Enter] on the keyboard.

The Remote UI screen appears.

  1. Enter the required data.

The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using.

  • In case of default settings:
  • Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode].

  • Enter the password or owner name and click [OK].

  • In case no management mode is set, and system manager ID and password is set:
  • Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User Mode].

  • For Administrator Mode, enter the System Manager Password, and click [OK]. For End-User Mode, enter the User ID and click [OK].

  • For Department ID Management mode:
  • Enter the Department ID and Password.

  • For User Management mode:
  • Enter the User ID and Password, and click [OK].

  • If no password is set, you can log on without entering a password.
  1. Operate the Machine.

Now you can manage the machine on the web browser.

1 Displays the current status of the machine.
2 Takes you to the Remote UI top page.
3 Updates (refreshes) the currently displayed screen with the latest information.
4 Displays the online help for the Remote UI.
5 Displays the current status of print jobs, etc.
6 Takes you back to the top of a current page.
7 Displays a list of settings for the machine, etc.
8 Displays one-touch or coded speed dialing data (fax numbers, etc.) registered on the machine.
Takes you back to the previous page.
  • For details on the Remote UI settings, see Online Help.


Checking Device Status and Information

You can view the current status of the machine and also information about the administrator in charge of the machine, the installation location and various machine settings.


Checking Device Status

Checking Device Information

Checking Device Features

Checking Network Settings

Checking Counter


Checking Device Status

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Device] → select [Status] from the menu that appears under [Device].

The [Status] screen appears displaying the remaining amount of paper in the various paper sources and any error messages. To check details of errors, click [Error Information].



Checking Device Information

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Device] → select [Information] from the menu that appears under [Device].

The [Information] screen appears displaying information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location of the machine.



Checking Device Features

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Device] → select [Features] from the menu that appears under [Device].

The [Features] screen appears displaying following items depending on the current system configuration:

  • Total RAM Size
  • Available RAM Size
  • Number of Drawers


Checking Network Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Device] → select [Network] from the menu that appears under [Device].

The [Network] screen appears displaying information about the network interface and any network protocols that are enabled.



Checking Counter

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Device] → select [Counter Check] from the menu that appears under [Device].

The [Counter Check] screen appears displaying the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing.



Job Management

The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs. It also enables you to view the sending and receiving results of fax jobs.


Remark
  • If you set <Checking the Log> to <Off> in <System Settings>, no job logs appear in the list.

Managing Print Jobs

Viewing the Print Job Log

Viewing the Activity Log


Managing Print Jobs

Return to Overview

You can use the Remote UI to manage print jobs that are being processed by the machine, or are held in the print queue.


Remark
  • If you log in using the End-User Mode and [Permit End-user's Job Operation] in [Add. Func.] ([System Settings] → [Edit] → [Register Password]) is set to OFF, you cannot delete any print jobs. When [Permit End-user's Job Operation] is set, you can delete print jobs which you have owner privileges.
  1. Click [Job Status] → [Print Job] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

A list of print jobs being waiting or processed by the machine appears.

  1. To delete a print job, select the check box next to the job to delete → click .

You cannot recover the job once it is deleted.



Viewing the Print Job Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the [Print Log].
The [Print Log] shows up to 128 most recent print jobs.


Remark
  • If you set <Checking the Log> to <Off> in <System Settings>, no job logs appear in the list.
  1. Click [Job Status] → [Print Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

The [Print Log] screen appears displaying information about print jobs that have already been processed by the machine.

  • If an error occurs during printing, the error code following [NG] appears in [Print Results].

Example: NG (#0816)

Cause:

The page limit for printing reached the maximum.

Remedy:

Increase the page limit, or do not set the limit. (See "Managing the Department/User ID.")



Viewing the Activity Log

Return to Overview

The Remote UI enables you to view the [Activity Log] of send and receive jobs. The [Activity Log] shows up to 40 most recent transactions.

  1. Click [Job Status] → [Activity Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

The [Activity Log] screen appears displaying information about send and receive jobs that have already been processed by the machine.



Managing the Address Book

The Remote UI enables you to view and modify the Address Book data.


Remark
  • You can modify the Address Book data only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."

Registering, Editing, Deleting Coded Dial

Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial

Registering, Editing, Deleting Favorites Buttons


Registering, Editing, Deleting Coded Dial

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → [Coded Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].

If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered addresses:

To register a new address:

To delete the registered addresses:

  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Change Address screen → click [OK].

  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

  • 2. Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

  • 3. For group dialing, select [Group] from [Type] → enter a group name in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].

  • 4. Select [Coded Dial] from the drop-down list → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].

  • 5. Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in the listbox under [Members List] → click [OK].

  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → [One-touch Speed Dial] from the menu that appears under [Address].

If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered One-touch Speed Dials:

To register a new One-touch Speed Dials:

To delete the registered One-touch Speed Dials:

  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Change Address screen → click [OK].

  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

  • 2. Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

  • 3. For group dialing, select [Group] from [Type] → enter a group name in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under [Members List].

  • 4. Select [One-touch Speed Dial] from the drop-down list → select the check box next to the number to register for the group dialing → click [OK].

  • 5. Make sure that the registered addresses are displayed in [Members List] → click [OK].

  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to delete → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is deleted.


Registering, Editing, Deleting Favorites Buttons

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Address] → [Favorites Button] from the menu that appears under [Address].

If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].

  • If you set an address book password, the screen for entering the password appears when you click [Address].

To view/edit the registered Favorites Buttons:

To register a new Favorites Button:

To clear a registered Favorites Button:

  • 1. Click the number or the name to display the current address information.

  • 2. To edit the information, click [Edit] → make the necessary changes on the Edit Favorites Button screen → click [OK].



  • 1. Click [None] or any number for which [None] is displayed as the name.

  • 2. Specify the type of address from [Type] → enter the necessary information → click [OK].

  • 1. Select the check box next to the number to clear → click [].

  • You cannot recover the address once it is cleared.


Customizing System Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's system settings.


Remark
  • You can also access the System Setting from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → [System Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Edit].

  1. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].


  • 1. Click [Restrict Access to Destinations] → specify the necessary fields → click [OK].



  • 1. Click [Register ID and Password] or [Register Password] → specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


When the Department ID Management mode is deactivated, the setting items for the System Manager ID are not displayed.




Specifying Forwarding Settings

The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:

  • Forwarding conditions are set: the machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.
  • Forwarding conditions are not set: the machine will forward all received documents.

Remark
  • [Forwarding Settings] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.].


  • 1. Click [] (Add New Conditions) → specify the necessary fields → click [OK].


Receive Type: Select [Fax] or [I-Fax] for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select [Enable This Forwarding Condition], this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded.
The setting items differ depending on the type of the receiving mode:

Items for Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition.
[does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.

Items for I-Fax:

[disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Destination, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

Forwarding Destination: Specify an address from the Address Book by clicking [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list → click [OK].
Forwarding Settings: If you are forwarding documents to an email address or a file server, you can set their file format to [TIFF] or [PDF].
If you select [Divide into Pages], you can forward files as divided pages.

  • 1. Click [Forwarding without Conditions].


  • 2. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

  1. Select the receiving mode from [Receive Type].

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.


  • 1. Click the condition name to display the current forwarding setting.


  • 2. To change the setting, make the necessary changes → click [OK].


  • 1. Select the check box next to the forwarding condition to delete → click [] (Delete the Selected Conditions).

  • You cannot recover the setting once it is deleted.

  • 1. Click [Print Forwarding Conditions List].



Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer

By registering a Department/User ID and password for each department/user, you can manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department/User ID and password. Department/User IDs and passwords for up to 1000 departments/users can be registered. You can also set the page limit for each department to copy, print, and scan for sending documents.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the operation panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."
  • [Department ID/User Management] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  • If you are using Department ID Management, we recommend that you register the System Manager ID first. Otherwise, all users will be considered as end-users and anyone cannot change some of the machine's settings using the Remote UI.
  • If you are using User Management, you need to register a user ID with the administrator privilege first. Otherwise, you could not log in the administrator mode and change some of the machine's settings.
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Department ID/User Management] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Settings].

  • The list of Department IDs or User IDs registered in the machine is displayed in groups of one hundred. If you want to display another group, click the drop-down list on the top right corner of the screen → select a group.
  • If the User ID Management mode is activated, you can click [Change List View] to switch the Management mode list between Department and User ID.
  1. Select [Enable Department ID Management] or [Enable User Management] to activate the management mode.

  1. Click [Department ID Management Settings] or [User Management Settings] to register a new department or user.

  • If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, do not register a new department or user.
  1. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Department ID registration screen

User ID registration screen

Department ID: Enter the Department ID number the user belongs to (seven digits maximum). If the Department ID Management mode is set, be sure to assign the user to a department. Otherwise, the user cannot log on to the machine.
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the Department ID.
Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
User Type: Classify the user in two categories [User] (End-User Mode) or [Administrator] (Administrator Mode).
Display Name: Enter the user name.
E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the user.
User ID: Enter a log-on name (32 characters maximum).
Set Password: Select this check box to set a password for the User ID.
Password: Enter a character (32 characters maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the character you enter here is different from the character entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
  • If User ID Management is enabled, [Display Name] and [E-mail Address] registered here are displayed in the From field on the e-mail recipient's machine, instead of the unit name registered in <TX/RX SETTINGS>.
  • To view/change the registered Department/User ID:
  • 1. Click [] or the user name to display the current department or user information.

  • 2. To change the information, make the necessary changes → click [OK].

  • To delete the registered Department/User ID:
  • 1. Select the check box next to the Department/User ID to delete → click [] (Delete).

  • If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, do not delete a department or user.


Import/Export Function

The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book and other settings information, such as a file that can be loaded into the machine when needed. This function is useful when you want to use the same settings on another machine, and for backing up. The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take more than a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • Do not operate the machine while importing or exporting an address book.
  • During an Export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • [Import/Export] is displayed only when you are in the Administrator Mode.

Saving the Address Book (Export)

Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)

Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)


Saving the Address Book (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer.

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Address Book].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load address books into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • When you register the contents of a new file, the currently registered addresses are overwritten by the new address list.
  • You can register up to 200 addresses in the Address Book. Each address is treated as a separate item.
  • You cannot import the group dialing information which contains another group dialing.
  • When Delayed Sending is set on the machine, do not import an address book.
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Address Book].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.


Saving User Management Data in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store User Management Data as a file in your computer.


Remark
  • User type of all exported data is End-User.
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [User Management Data].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load User Management Data into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • Imported user data is registered or overwritten as End-User.
  1. Click [Add.Func.] → [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [User Management Data].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import click [OK].

  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.
  • If overlapped User IDs are registered in imported data, those IDs will be registered in the machine as being overlapped. Among those overlapped data, the last registered one is available.


Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

Return to Overview

You can store Additional Functions settings as a file in your computer.

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Additional Functions].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

The file is saved in the specified location.



Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

Return to Overview

You can load Additional Functions settings into the machine from saved files.

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Additional Functions].

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [OK].

  • When Additional Functions settings are imported, the System Manager ID, Department IDs, and Network Settings are automatically overwritten.
  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.


Device Custom Settings

The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI.
The following procedure shows how to customize the machine's settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • You can also access these setting menus from the Operation Panel of the machine. For details, see "Machine Settings."

Common Settings

Timer Settings

Copy Settings

TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Report Settings

Printer Settings

PCL Settings (PCL Only)

Network Settings


Common Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Common Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Initial Function: Sets the function for the machine when starting up.
Auto Clear Settings: Sets the function for the machine returns to for standby mode after Auto Clear.
Audible Tones: Sets whether to sound audible tones and adjusts their volume.
Use Toner Save Mode: Sets the toner saver mode.
Printer Exposure Settings: Recalibrates the exposure adjustment scale if differences between the image in the document and the print occur.
Auto Drawer Select: Sets whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job.
Register Paper Type: Sets the default paper type for each drawer.
Register Paper Size: Sets the default paper size for each drawer.
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode: Selects power consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode between two levels.
Use Stack Bypass Standard Settings: Sets whether to use the default paper size and paper type, and specifies these settings.
Paper Feed Switch: Sets the paper feed method for each drawer.
ADF Dirty Error: Sets whether the error message will appear when the ADF is dirty.


Timer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Timer Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Date & Time Setup: Sets the current date and time.
Time Zone: Sets the current date and time.
Use Auto Sleep: Sets the Auto Sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time.
Use Auto Clear: Sets the Auto Clear mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time. The machine returns to standby mode.
Use Daylight Saving Time Settings: Sets the Daylight Saving Time mode.


Copy Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Copy Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Image Direction Priority: Sets whether to activate the image direction priority.
Image Quality: Sets the default document type for copying.
Density: Sets the default density for copying.
Paper Size Group: Selects the default paper size group for your machine.
Zoom Ratio: Sets the default zoom ratio for copying.
Copies: Sets the default number of copies (1-99).
Auto Sort: Sets whether to collate the copies automatically.
2-Sided Printing: Sets the type of 2-sided copying.
Frame Erase: Sets the type of Frame Erase copying.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness of the copied image (1-9).
mm/inch Entry: Sets the unit of measurement of the frame erase width.


TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [TX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Unit Name: Registers your name/company name.
Data Compression Ratio: Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
Retry Times: Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an e-mail or file server address.
Scanning Density: Adjusts the scanning density for sending documents (1-9).
File Format: Sets the default file format for the document you send.
Image Quality: Sets the default image quality for the document you send.
Original Type: Sets the default original type for the document you send.
Density: Sets the default density for the document you send.
Divide into Pages: Sets whether to use <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> as default.
Send Settings: Sets the options for sending documents to an e-mail or I-fax address, or file server.
Add TX Terminal ID: Sets the options for sender information.
Gamma Value For Color Send Jobs: Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient's machine, the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient's machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
Sharpness: Sets the contrast of the images you scan (1-7).
Color TX Scan Settings: Sets the priority for color scanned data.


RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [RX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Add Two-Sided: Sets the type of 2-sided printing for faxing.
RX Reduction: Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size.
Continue Printing When Toner is Out: Selects how the machine responds when the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears.


User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [User Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

User Tel Number: Registers your fax number
Tel Line Type: Selects the telephone line type.
Off hook Alarm: Sets whether the alarm sounds when the handset of the external telephone is off the hook.
Volume Control: Adjusts the monitor volume and the calling volume.
Direct TX: Sets whether to use the direct sending mode.


TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [TX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

ECM TX: Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is activated.
Pause Time: Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing sequence.
Enable Auto Redial: Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is busy or a transmission error occurs.
Time Out: Sets whether to scan a document automatically after specifying the destination.
Check Dialtone Before Sending: Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.


RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [RX Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Enable ECM RX: Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is activated.
Receive Mode: Sets the receive mode.
DRPD: Selects the ring pattern for fax calls.
FAX/TEL. Option Settings: Sets the optional items in <FaxTel> mode.
Use Incoming Ring: Sets whether the external telephone rings when the machine receives a fax. This function is only available when <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>.
Remote RX: Sets whether to use remote receiving. This function is not available when <Energy In Sleep> in <Common Settings> is set to <Low>.
Manual/Auto Switch: Sets whether the machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode.


Report Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add.Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add.Func.] → click [Report Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

TX Report: Sets whether the transmission report prints out.
Activity Report: Sets whether to automatically print the activity report and selects its type.
RX Report: Sets whether the reception report prints out.


Printer Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Printer Settings].

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Default Paper Size: Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified.
Default Paper Type: Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.
Copies: Sets the number of documents printed (1-999).
2-Sided Printing: Sets whether to activate 2-sided printing.
Print Quality: Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing.
Layout: Sets the printing layout.
Collate: Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.
Error Timeout: Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer.


PCL Settings (PCL Only)

Return to Overview

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Common Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [PLC Settings] under the Printer Settings menu.

  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].

Orientation: Sets the page direction.
Font Number: Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using the corresponding font numbers.
Point Size: Specifies a point size for the default font. This item appears when the number in <Font Number> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font.
Pitch: Sets the number of characters at cpi.
Form Lines: Sets the number of lines.
Symbol Set: Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.
Use Irregular Size: Use Irregular Size paper.
Unit of Measure: Sets the unit of the user specified paper size.
X dimension: Sets the width of the user specified paper.
Y dimension: Sets the height of the user specified paper.
Append CR to LF: Sets a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.
Enlarge A4 Print Width: Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.


Network Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's network settings.

  • The settings made in the Network Settings is enabled only after the machine is restarted. Turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the power back ON.
  • You can modify the Address Book data only when you are in the Administrator Mode.
  1. Click [Device] → select [Network] from the menu that appears under [Device] → Click [Change].



Startup Time: Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine.
Obtain an IP Address Automatically: Sets whether to automatically set an IP address.
IP Address: Specifies a fixed IP address to the machine.
Subnet Mask: Specifies a fixed subnet mask to the machine.
Gateway Address: Specifies a fixed gateway address to the machine.
Primary Server (DNS): Specifies the primary DNS server address.
Secondary Server (DNS): Specifies the secondary DNS server address.
DNS Host Name: Registers the host name of the DNS server.
DNS Domain Name: Registers the domain name of the DNS server.
DNS Dynamic Update: This setting is not functional in this model.
WINS Resolution: Sets whether to resolve a name with WINS.
WINS Server: Specifies the IP address of a WINS server.
Use LPD: Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
Raw Settings: Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.
Use Bidirectional: Sets whether to use bi-directional communication.
Use PASV Mode for FTP: Sets the PASV mode for FTP.
FTP Extension: Sets the FTP Extension setting.
Use HTTP: Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) for the Remote UI.
Proxy Settings: Sets to use Proxy server.
PORT Number Settings: Sets the port number for each protocol.
Use IP Address Range Settings: Sets to restrict the range of IP addresses.
RX MAC Address Settings: Sets to activate a MAC address filter.
SMB Settings: Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS network.
SNMP Settings: Sets detailed information about SNMP.
Dedicated Port: Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
Ethernet Driver Settings: Specifies the type of network connection.
E-mail/I-Fax Settings: Sets the network settings to use the E-mail/I-Fax features.
  • If you are changing the Network Settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the power back ON.


Network Settings

This category describes how to set the machine and your network environment to use the network functions.
If you are using the imageRUNNER 1025, an optional network board is required to use network functions.



Basic Network Settings

This machine has a USB connector and LAN connector. If the machine is connected to a network using a LAN cable, you can use the machine as a network printer, or use functions such as the I-fax function, which lets you send and receive faxes over the Internet.


Remark
  • The machine does not come with a LAN cable.
  • You can use the imageRUNNER 1025 in a network environment if the optional network board is installed.
  1. Connect a Category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable to the 10Base-T/100Base-TX port on the back of the machine. Connect the other end of the cable to a network router or a hub.

If you use the machine as a local printer, connect the machine directly to a computer using a USB cable. (See "Connection between a Computer and the Machine.")



Setting and Checking the IP Address

Setting the IP address to the machine allows it to communicate with computers on the network.


Setting IP Address

The following are the procedures for specifying the IP Address settings. If you set IP address automatically using such as DHCP, you can confirm the IP address settings by performing the procedure in "Confirming IP Address Settings" after configuring the IP Address settings.


Setting IP Address Automatically

Setting IP Address Manually

Confirming IP Address Settings

Remark
  • Before performing the following procedure, make sure that the machine is turned on and connected to a network.
  • This machine is set by default to automatically draw an IP address using DHCP. If your network server or router is configured to provide a DHCP address, all you need to do is connect a network cable and turn on the machine. The machine will draw an IP address automatically.
  • This machine also supports automatic IP addresses using BOOTP and RARP protocols. If you use these protocols, then specify the <2. BOOTP> or <3. RARP> in the procedure of "Setting IP Address Automatically."


Setting IP Address Automatically

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IP ADDRESS AUTO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired protocol, then press [OK].

<1. DHCP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via DHCP.

<2. BOOTP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via BOOTP.

<3. RARP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via ARP.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • You can select <ON> or <OFF> for each protocol independently. If the protocol you don't want to use is set to <ON>, you need to set it to <OFF>.


Setting IP Address Manually

Return to Overview

The following are the procedures for specifying the IP address manually.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IP ADDRESS AUTO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SUBNET MASK> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the subnet mask using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <GATEWAY ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the gateway address number using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


Confirming IP Address Settings

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <IP ADDRESS>, <SUBNET MASK>, or <GATEWAY ADDRESS> for displaying the setting you want to check, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax

This section describes procedures for setting scan to e-mail and I-fax.


Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax

Using this feature, you can scan a document and send it as an attached file from this machine without using your computer. If a recipient's address is registered in advance, you can do this very easily. This feature is useful when you want to send paper copies of documents to your customers or peers quickly.


System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when using the scan to e-mail and I-fax features in this machine:

  • Mail forwarding server software
  • Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
  • Mail receiving server software
  • Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)

Remark
  • The machine sends e-mail to mail servers using SMTP.
  • The machine can receive incoming messages from a mail server using the POP3 protocol or directly using the machinefs own SMTP receiving function. If the latter method is used, it is not necessary for the mail server to support the POP3 protocol.
  • The machine can receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.

Setup Procedures for Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax

To set up the scan to e-mail and I-fax functions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Setup the network following to the explanation on "Basic Network Settings."
  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting and Checking the IP Address."
  1. Perform procedures described under "Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax."
  1. Perform procedures described under "Settings from the Machine."


Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax

Return to Overview

You may set the e-mail account you are currently using to this machine if you intend to use this machine only for sending a document scanned using the scan to e-mail and I-fax functions in this machine.
In such case, the following information is required:


SMTP server address: This is the server address to send an e-mail.
Authentication method: The following two authentication methods are supported.
(The authentication may not be required depending on the internet provider.)
•SMTP authentication
This is the authentication method in which the SMTP server checks the user name and password before sending e-mails.
•POP before SMTP
This is the authentication method in which the POP server checks the POP address and POP password before sending e-mails. If your provider uses this method, you need to make settings both to send e-mails in this machine.

Preparing to Receive I-Faxes

If the provider uses POP before SMTP as the authentication method to send e-mails or if you want this machine to receive I-faxes, you need another POP 3 e-mail account for this machine in addition to the e-mail account you are currently using. For details on the issue of another e-mail account, please consult with your internet provider or network administrator. To make settings, the following information is required.


Remark
  • Please note that this machine can only receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.

POP server: The server address that is used when receiving e-mails. In some cases, the address is same as the SMTP server address.
POP address: This is sometimes called as a mail account or mail ID.
POP password: The password that is required to receive e-mails.


Checking Your E-mail Account

Return to Overview

If you want to set the e-mail account you are currently using to this machine, you can view information required for the setting on your e-mail software in use. Taking Outlook Express 6.x (the e-mail software included with Windows XP) as an example, this section describes the procedures to check your e-mail account.


Remark
  • For Windows Mail (the e-mail software included with Windows Vista), you can check your e-mail account in the same way as for Outlook Express 6.x.

For Outlook Express 6.x:
  1. Start Outlook Express 6.x.
  1. On the [Tools] menu, select [Account] to open the [Internet Account] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Mail] tab.

  1. Select the account in use, then click [Properties] to open the [<Account name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Servers] tab.
  • If you want to confirm the necessary Information for sending e-mails and I-faxes
  • Confirm the SMTP server address in [Outgoing mail (SMTP)].

  • If there is no need for authentication, proceed to Step 9.
  • If your provider uses the POP before SMTP authentication method, you need information required for settings to receive e-mails and I-faxes.
  • If SMTP authentication is used, proceed to Step 6.
  • If you want to confirm the necessary Information for receiving e-mails and I-faxes
  • Confirm the POP server address in [Incoming mail (POP3)], POP account in [Account name], and POP password in [Password]. Proceed to Step 9.

  1. Click [Settings] under [Outgoing Mail Server] to open the [Outgoing Mail Server] dialog box.
  1. Confirm [Account name] (user name authorized by SMTP server).

  • The typed password is hidden with "***". Therefore, use a notification form delivered from your provider to check the password.
  1. Once you complete confirmation, click [Cancel] to close the [Outgoing Mail Server] dialog box.
  1. Click [Cancel] to close the [<Account name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click [Close] to close the [Internet Account] dialog box.


Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-Fax)

Return to Overview

To set up the scan to e-mail and I-fax function, follow the procedure below.


Setting up the E-Mail and I-Fax Send Functions

When no Authentication is Required


When SMTP Authentication is Used


When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used


When a POP Server is Used


When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used



When No Authentication is Required

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when no authentication is required.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the SMTP server name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the SMTP server name if the SMTP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
  • Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is not registered in the DNS server.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the e-mail address your machine will use using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <POP BEFORE SEND> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).

  1. Confirm that <SMTP AUTH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax).

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


When SMTP Authentication is Used

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when the SMTP authentication is used.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the SMTP server name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the SMTP server name if the SMTP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
  • Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is not registered in the DNS server.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the e-mail address your machine will use using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <POP BEFORE SEND> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).

  1. Confirm that <SMTP AUTH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax).

  1. Confirm that <USER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the user name used for logging in to the SMTP server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password used for loggin in to the SMTP server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when the POP before SMTP authentication is used.


Remark
  • If your provider uses this method, you need to make settings also to receive I-faxes using the POP server. (See "When a POP Server is Used.")
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMTP SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the SMTP server name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the SMTP server name if the SMTP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
  • Enter the IP address of the SMTP server if the SMTP server name is not registered in the DNS server.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the e-mail address your machine will use using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <POP BEFORE SEND> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).

  1. Confirm that <SMTP AUTH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication.

<ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax).

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


When a POP Server is Used

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the I-fax reception Functions when a POP server is used.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SMTP RX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive I-fax using a POP server, select <OFF>.

<ON>: Receives I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.

  • The machine can receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.
  • You must register the host name of the machine with the DNS server if you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using a POP server. If you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <OFF>.

<ON>: Receives I-fax using a POP server.

  • The machine can receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP SERVER>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the POP server name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Enter the POP server name if the POP server name is already registered in the DNS server.
  • Enter the IP address of the POP server if the POP server name is not registered in the DNS server.
  1. Confirm that <POP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the login name for access to the POP server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <POP PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password for access to the POP server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <POP INTERVAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to set the interval at which you want to check the POP server for incoming e-mail, then press [OK].
  • If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the I-fax reception functions when the machine's own SMTP receiving function is used.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL/I-FAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SMTP RX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive I-fax using a POP server, select <OFF>.

<ON>: Receives I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.

  • The machine can receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.
  • You must register the host name of the machine with the DNS server if you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <POP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using a POP server. If you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <OFF>.

<ON>: Receives I-fax using a POP server.

  • The machine can receive I-fax images, but not any other type of e-mail.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


Setting Scan to File Server

This section describes procedures for setting Scan to File Server.


Scan to File Server

Using this feature, you can send a scanned document to a file server on a network.
This is very useful when you want to back up frequently-used documents such as a quotation form or when you want to share information on a project with your peers.


System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server, depending on the type of network used:

  • Servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Internet Information Services 5.0
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Internet Information Services 5.1
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Internet Information Services 6.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista and Internet Information Services 7.0
  • Microsoft Windows Sever 2008 and Internet Information Service 7.0
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later
  • Mac OS X
  • FTP server for imageWARE Gateway
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP
  • Servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008
  • Server software for sending data
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later (Mac OS X/UNIX/Linux)
  • Protocol
  • NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.

Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server

To set up the Scan to Scan to File Server function, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

  • Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server (FTP)

  1. Setup the network following to the explanation on "Basic Network Settings."

  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting and Checking the IP Address."

  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting File Server (FTP)."

  • Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server (File Sharing)

  1. Setup the network following to the explanation on "Basic Network Settings."

  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting and Checking the IP Address."

  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting File Server (File Sharing)."


Setting File Server (FTP)

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP server.


Remark
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer to receive data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the display. For instructions on how to specify destination address settings, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)."
  • The following procedure explains a sample FTP server setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008

Mac OS X

UNIX

FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008

Return to Overview


Remark
  • It is recommended that the FTP server be configured by the network administrator.
  • The use of Windows 2000 Server as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.0 (IIS 5.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings.
    For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows XP Professional as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1 (IIS 5.1).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
    Windows XP Home Edition cannot be used as an FTP server.
  • The use of Windows Server 2003 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0 (IIS 6.0).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
  • The use of Windows Vista/Server 2008 as an FTP server requires the installation of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1 (IIS 5.1).
    If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install IIS before entering these settings. For installation procedures, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
    Windows XP Home Edition cannot be used as an FTP server.
  • Verification of users for access to FTP servers is done by referencing the local account database Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 that is used as the FTP server. Therefore, it is not possible to use the account of a domain user registered in Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 to send data directly from the machine to FTP servers in other domains.
  • This section describes the procedures for using the default home directory under [Default FTP Site]. To use other settings, enter the FTP site and home directory by referring to the documentation for IIS.
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.
  1. Log on to Windows as a member of the group with access rights to the directory to be designated as the FTP site directory.
  • Depending on your environment, the access rights settings for a drive or directory may differ. For details, see the Windows documentation.
  1. Start IIS.

For Windows 2000/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Services Manager].

For Windows XP, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].

For Windows Server 2003, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services Manager].

For Windows Vista, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services].

  1. Enter the FTP site settings.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows XP/Server 2003, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties].

In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, click the [Security Accounts] tab to display the [Security Accounts] sheet.

For Windows 2000, deselect [Allow Anonymous Connections]. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, deselect [Allow only anonymous connection].

Click the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] sheet → select both [Read] and [Write].

Click [OK] to close the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box.

  1. Confirm [Full computer name].

For Windows 2000:

Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop -> click [Properties].

Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the [System Properties] dialog box.

For Windows XP/Server 2003:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008:
Click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties].
Click the [Computer Name] tab to display the [Computer Name] sheet → confirm [Full computer name].
Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box.

  1. Set up the users and passwords for access to the FTP server.

For Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows XP/Server 2003, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.

Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups] → right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].

In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm password].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 (14 for Windows 2000) alphanumeric characters. If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the operation panel.)

Confirm the settings → click [Create].

Close the [Computer Management] window.

  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Full computer name]: starfish.organization.company.com Create a directory named "share" in the specified FTP server's directory "\Inetpub\ftproot", and then set "share" as the data destination.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: starfish.organization.company.com
<FILE PATH>: share
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 5
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for <HOST NAME> as shown in the example, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the operation panel, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.


Mac OS X

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are based on Mac OS X version 10.4. The procedures may differ depending on the versions of Mac OS X you are using.
  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator.
  1. Start the FTP services under Mac OS X.
  • Click the Apple icon in the top left of the screen → [System Preferences].
  • Click the [Sharing] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click to select the [FTP Access] → click [Start].
  • Click [Show all] on the toolbar.
  1. Specify the user to whom you want to send data, and then the password.
  • Click the [Accounts] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click [] to create a new account.
  • Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  • Click [Create Account].
  • Close the [Accounts] window.
  1. Create a shared folder to which files are to be sent.

Sample setting:

Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder.

  1. Grant access to the shared folder created in step 4.
  • Click to select the shared folder → select [Get Info] from the [File] menu.
  • Click [Ownership & Permissions] → [Details].
  • Enable read and write access to the folder by the owner and members of a group to which the owner belongs.
  • Close the Info window.
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
(set using the above procedure): Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder of the user named "yoko", and then specify the iR_Folder as the folder to which files are sent.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: IP address of Macintosh
<FILE PATH>: Enter an absolute path to a folder to which files are sent:
/Users/yoko/Public/iR_Folder
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 3
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the operation panel, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.


UNIX

Return to Overview


Remark
  • UNIX users must have Solaris 2.6 or later installed in order to use the computer as an FTP server.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use FTP. For details, consult your network manager.
  1. Log in to a workstation as a super user.
  1. Set up the users who send documents from the machine, and their passwords.

Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Create a shared directory to be used for destination addresses, and then enable read access and write access by the users who will be sending data.
  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Host name]: starfish
[Domain]: organization.company.com
The user's home directory is /home/hsato, and /home/hsato/share is the data destination.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <FTP>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: starfish.organization.company.com
<FILE PATH>: Enter one of the following:
share (when using relative path)/home/hsato/share (when using absolute path)
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 2
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • To use the host name of the above example for <HOST NAME>, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the operation panel, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.


FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway

Return to Overview


Remark
  • An FTP server for imageWARE Gateway is required for receiving data from the machine when used with imageWARE Gateway.
  • If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set <FTP EXTENSION> to <ON>. For more information, see "Setting FTP Extension."
  1. Set up the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, specify the folder to store data sent from the machine.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for a folder name.
  • Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  1. On the FTP server for imageWARE Gateway, export destination data.

For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.

  • A DNS server is needed to use an FQDN format (for example, starfish.organization.company.com) for the FTP server address. (A DNS server is also required if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If you have not set up a DNS server, use IP addresses.]
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for an FTP server address of the FQDN format.
  1. Use the Remote UI of the machine to import the destination data exported in step 3 into the machine.
  • Click [Add. Func.] of the Remote UI → click [Import/Export].
  • Click [Address Book].
  • Click [Import].
  • Click [Browse] → select the file to import.
  • Click [OK].
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.


Setting File Server (File Sharing)

Return to Overview

To set up File Server (File Sharing), follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Set the protocol to this machine.
  1. Set an Computer as File Server.
  • Setting an Computer as File Server (Windows).
  • Setting an Computer as File Server (Mac OS)
  • Setting an Computer as File Server (UNIX/Linux)


Settings from the Machine (File Sharing)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedure below to set up the send files function of the machine.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SMB SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USE SMB CLIENT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not send data to the file server.

<ON>: Sends data to the file server.

  1. Confirm that <SERVER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the NetBIOS name of the machine using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • Be sure to enter a unique name that does not exist as a name for another computer or printer on the same network.
  • You cannot enter a character string that includes blanks.
  1. Confirm that <WORKGROUP> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • You cannot enter the domain name as the workgroup name.
  • You cannot enter a character string that includes blanks.
  1. Confirm that <COMMENT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. If necessary, enter a comment using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


Confirming Computer Name and Necessary Components for File Sharing

Return to Overview

To store a scanned document to a shared folder on a computer using the Scan to File server function, you need to set up your computer accordingly.
Follow the procedures below to check the computer name and whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed.


If you are using Windows 2000

Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000)


If you are using Windows Server 2003

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003)


If you are using Windows XP

Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP)


If you are using Windows Vista

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista)


If you are using Windows Server 2008

Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008)



Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Right-click the [My Computer] on the desktop. Click [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box
  1. Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet.
  1. Click [Properties]
  1. In the [Identification Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.

  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • Right-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop. Select [Properties] to open the [Network and Dialup Connections] dialog box.
  • Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.


Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Right-click [My Computer] on the desktop. Select [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Computer Name] tab.
  1. Click [Change...].
  1. In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.

  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar. Select [Control Panel].
  • Double-click the [Network Connections] icon.
  • Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.


Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. Right-click [My Computer] on the desktop. Select [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box.
  1. Click the [Computer Name] tab.
  1. Click [Change...].
  1. In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, confirm the computer name in the [Computer name] box.

  1. Click [Cancel] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.

  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • On the [Start] menu, right-click [My Network Places]. Select [Properties].
  • Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  1. Check whether or not the network components required for file sharing are installed.

Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Component Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For details, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.


Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Computer]. Select [Properties].
  1. In the [System] window, confirm the computer name.

  1. Close the [System] window.


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.

  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • On the [Start] menu, right-click [Network]. Select [Properties].
  • Click [Manage network connections].
  • Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].
  1. Check whether or not the components required for file sharing are installed.

Check that all of the following check boxes are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Feature Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For the setting, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.


Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address.
Follow the procedures below to confirm the computer name.

  1. Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, right-click [Computer]. Select [Properties].
  1. In the [System] window, confirm the computer name.

  1. Close the [System] window.


Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer.

  1. Open the [Local Area Connection] dialog box.
  • On the [Start] menu, right-click [Network]. Select [Properties].
  • Click [Manage network connections].
  • Right-click [Local Area Connection]. Select [Properties].
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].
  1. Check whether or not the components required for file sharing are installed.

Check that all of the following check boxes are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.

  • [Client for Microsoft Networks]
  • [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks]
  • [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]

  • If any component is not installed, follow the procedures below to install it.
  • Click [Install...] to open the [Select Network Feature Type] dialog box.
  • If [Client for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Client], and then click [Add...].
  • If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not installed, select [Service], and then click [Add...].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, select [Protocol], and then click [Add...].
  • Select the component you want to install, and then click [OK].
  • If [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] is not installed, you need to set an IP address for your computer. For the setting, ask your network administrator.
  1. Click [OK] repeatedly to close all the dialog boxes.
  1. Restart your computer, if required.


Setting Shared Folder

Return to Overview

Once you confirm that the required components are installed, set a shared folder in which a scanned document is stored as a file.
There are two setting options for the shared folder:


Shared Folder without Access Control Applied

This is useful when you want to share files with other users over a network without any restrictions.
Users can access these folders from any computers on the network without having to enter a user name and password.



Follow the procedures below to set the shared folder without access control applied.


File Sharing without Access Restriction


Shared Folder with Access Control Applied

This is useful when you want to limit access to certain users.
To access a shared folder of this type, users have to enter their accounts (their user names and passwords) that are set to that shared folder. If they don't know their accounts, they cannot access that shard folder.



Follow the procedures below to shared folder with access control applied.


File Sharing with Access Restriction



File Sharing without Access Restriction

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to set the shared folder without access control applied.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)

File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008)


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview


Access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Right-click the created folder.
  • Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  • Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • In the [Sharing] page, click the [Permissions] button to open the [Permissions for <Folder Name>].

  • In the [Permissions for <Folder name>], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone] to grant. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] if not selected.

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Name>] dialog box.
  • If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder name> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.
  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • In the [<Folder name> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type "Everyone" in [Enter the object names to select].

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Security], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone]. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: Leave this box blank.
<PASSWORD>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview


Access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Right-click the created folder.
  • Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  • Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • In the [Sharing] page, click the [Permissions] button to open the [Permissions for <Folder Name>].

  • In the [Permissions for <Folder name>], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone] to grant. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow] if not selected.

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Name>] dialog box.
  • If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder name> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.
  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • In the [<Folder name> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type the following in [Enter the object names to select].

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • In the [Security], under [Group or user names], select [Everyone]. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].
  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Activate the Guest user account.
  • Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window.
  • Under [System Tools], click [Local Users and Groups].
  • Double-click the [Guest] user.

  • Deselect [Account is Disabled] to activate the Guest user account.

  • Click [OK] to close the [Guest Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: Leave this box blank.
<PASSWORD>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

If you are using Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition, use simple file sharing to set shared folders without access control applied.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows XP Professional and simple file sharing is disabled, follow the procedures below to enable it.
  • On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel], and then select [Folder Options] to open the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  • Select the [View] tab.
  • Under [Advanced settings], select the [Use simple file sharing (Recommended)] check box.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Folder Options] dialog box.
  1. Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  1. Click [If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here.].

  • This message is not displayed at the second time or later. In such case, proceed to Step 6.
  1. In the [Public folder sharing] dialog box, select the [Just enable file sharing] check box, and then click [OK].

  1. Select the [Share this folder on the network] and [Allow network users to change my files] check boxes.

  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: Leave this box blank.
<PASSWORD>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

In Windows Vista, you can use the special folder named "Public folder" in which files can be shared with other users on the same network. Using Public folder, you can set a shared folder without access control applied.


Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel].

  1. Click [Set up file sharing] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Network and Sharing Center] window, click the downwards arrow next to [Public folder sharing].


  1. Select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open, change, and create files], and then click [Apply].

  • Do not select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open files]. Otherwise, you will not be able to store a document scanned with this machine to a shared folder as a file.
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].

  1. Click the downwards arrow next to [Password protected sharing].


  1. Click [Turn off password protected sharing], and then click [Apply].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].

Creating a folder to store a file

You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedures to create a new folder to store a file in the Public folder.


  1. Display the Public folder in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Create a new folder in the Public folder.


  1. Set a destination address using the display.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
Delimitate Public folder and the other folder using "\", as shown below.
Ex) \Public\share
<LOGIN NAME>: Leave this box blank.
<PASSWORD>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."(the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

In Windows Vista, you can use the special folder named "Public folder" in which files can be shared with other users on the same network. Using Public folder, you can set a shared folder without access control applied.


Sharing the Public folder

  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel].

  1. Click [Set up file sharing] to open the [Network and Sharing Center] window.


  1. In the [Network and Sharing Center] window, click the downwards arrow next to [Public folder sharing].


  1. Select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open, change, and create files], and then click [Apply].

  • Do not select [Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open files]. Otherwise, you will not be able to store a document scanned with this machine to a shared folder as a file.
  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].

Creating a folder to store a file

You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedures to create a new folder to store a file in the Public folder.


  1. Display the Public folder in Windows Explorer, etc.

  1. Create a new folder in the Public folder.


  1. Set a destination address using the display.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
Delimitate Public folder and the other folder using "\", as shown below.
Ex) \Public\share
<LOGIN NAME>: Leave this box blank.
<PASSWORD>: Leave this box blank.
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time."(the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


File Sharing with Access Restriction

Return to Overview

Follow the procedures below to set the file sharing with access restriction.


If you are using Windows 2000

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)


If you are using Windows Server 2003

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)


If you are using Windows XP

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)


If you are using Windows Vista

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)


If you are using Windows Server 2008

Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)



Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop. Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] dialog box.
  1. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups].

  1. Right-click the [Users] folder. Click [New User].
  1. Set up the user accessing the shared folder.
  • The user name must be up to 20 alphanumeric characters long.

  • In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name].
  • Enter the password in [Password]. Re-enter the password in [Confirm password].
  • Deselect [User must change password at next logon].
  • Select [Password never expires].
  • Confirm the settings. Click [Create].
  1. Close the [Computer Management] dialog box.


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well.


Access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Right-click the created folder.
  • Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  • Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • In the [Sharing] page, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Name>].

  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type the following in [Enter the object names to select].

[Computer Name]\[User Name]

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Permissions for <Folder name>], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Name>] dialog box.
  • If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder name> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • In the [<Folder name> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type the following in [Enter the object names to select].

[Computer Name]\[User Name]

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Security], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)."
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. Click [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer].
    Click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] dialog box.
  1. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups].

  1. Right-click the [Users] folder. Click [New User].
  1. Set up the user accessing the shared folder.
  • The user name must be up to 20 alphanumeric characters long.

  • In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name].
  • Enter the password in [Password]. Re-enter the password in [Confirm password].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  • Deselect [User must change password at next logon].
  • Select [Password never expires].
  • Confirm the settings. Click [Create].
  1. Close the [Computer Management] dialog box.


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well.


Access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Right-click the created folder.
  • Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  • Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • In the [Sharing] page, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Name>].

  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type the following in [Enter the object names to select].

[Computer Name]\[User Name]

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Permissions for <Folder name>], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Name>] dialog box.
  • If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder name> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • In the [<Folder name> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type the following in [Enter the object names to select].

[Computer Name]\[User Name]

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Security], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003)."
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)."
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel].
  1. Click [User Accounts].

  1. In the [User Accounts] dialog box, click [Create a new account].

  1. Type a user name in [Type a name for the new account], and then click [Next>].

  • The user name must be up to 20 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Select [Limited], and then click [Create Account].

  1. Click the created user, and then click [Create a password].

  1. Type a password in [Type a new password] and [Type the new password again to confirm], and then click [Create Password].

  • The password must be up to 14 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Close the [User Accounts] dialog box.


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well.


Access permissions

If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files.

There are two types of access permissions:

  • Network-level access permission

This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.

  • Local-level access permission

This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders.
The local-level access permission can be set only when the drive in which folders are located is formatted in NTFS.

  1. Set a shared folder.
  • Create a new folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Right-click the created folder.
  • Select [Sharing and Security...] to open the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.

  • Select [Share this folder].

  1. Set the network-level access permission.
  • In the [Sharing] page, click [Permissions] to open the [Permissions for <Folder Name>].

  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, the [Name Not Found] dialog box appears. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Permissions for <Folder name>], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  • Click [OK] to close the [Permissions for <Folder Name>] dialog box.
  • If the [Security] tab is displayed in the [<Folder name> Properties], proceed to Step 3 to set the local-level access permission. If not, proceed to Step 4.

  • The [Security] tab is not displayed when:
  • The drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
  • Simple file sharing is enabled.
  1. Set the local-level access permission.

If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.

  • In the [<Folder name> Properties], click the [Security] tab.
  • Click [Add...] to open the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  • Type [Computer Name]\[User Name] in [Enter the object names to select].

  • Click [Check Names]. Make sure that the correct object name is typed.
  • If a wrong object name is typed, you see the [Name Not Found] dialog box. If that happens, click [Cancel] to check whether or not the computer name and user name are wrong.
  • Click [OK] to close the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.
  • In the [Security], under [Group or user names], select the user whom you want to grant permission. Select the [Full Control] box under [Allow].

  • Select the [Full Control] box so that you can store data scanned with this machine to a computer (the file server).
  1. Click [OK] to close the [<Folder name> Properties] dialog box.
  1. Set a destination address using the display.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 5 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP)."
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)."
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 7 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel].
  1. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].
  1. In the [Manage Accounts] dialog box, click [Create a new account].

  1. In the [Create New Account] dialog box, select [Standard user], and then click [Create Account].

  • The user name must be up to 20 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Click the user name created in the [Change an Account], and then click [Create a password].

  1. In the [Create Password] dialog box, type the password in two boxes circled in black, and then click [Create password].

  • The password must be up to 14 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Close the [Change an Account] dialog box.


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well.

  1. Create a folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Use alphanumeric characters to name the folder.
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Share...] to open the [File Sharing] dialog box.

  1. Click [] on the left side of [Add...]. Select the user. Click [Add...].

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Contributor] or [Co-owner] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].
  • Access permissions in Windows Vista
  • Reader: A reader can only view shared files.
  • Contributor: A contributor can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  • Co-owner: A co-owner can perform all file operations including creating, altering, deleting shared files and altering access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Sample destination setting:

  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)."
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 6 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer.


Remark
  • Even if you don't create a new account by following the procedures below, you can add a pre-registered account as the user who is permitted to access the shared folder. In such case, you need to create a password if it is not set to the pre-registered account. Once the password is created, the user is prompted to type it when he/she logs on to a computer.
  1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel] to open [Control Panel].
  1. Click [Change account type].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Vista, click [Continue].
  1. In the [Manage Accounts] dialog box, click [Add...].

  1. In the [Add New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] and enter the domain in [Domain].

  • The user name must be up to 20 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Click [Next].
  1. In the [Add New User] dialog box, select [Standard user], and then click [Finish].

  1. In the [Create Password] dialog box, type the password in two boxes circled in black, and then click [Create password].
  • The password must be up to 14 alphanumeric characters long.
  1. Close the [Change an Account] dialog box.


Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008)

Return to Overview

Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well.

  1. Create a folder in any drive.

Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended.

Ex) C:\share

  • Use alphanumeric characters to name the folder.
  1. Right-click the created folder.
  1. Select [Share...] to open the [File Sharing] dialog box.

  1. Click [] to open the pull-down menu and select [Find...] from the pull-down menu in the [File Sharing] screen.

  1. Click [Advanced...] in the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  1. Click [Find Now] to display the user list.
  1. Select the user you want to give permission to access the folder in the [Search result:] list and click [OK].

  1. Click [OK] in the [Select Users or Groups] dialog box.

  1. Select the added user. Select the [Contributor] or [Co-owner] check box. Click [Share].

  • If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears in Windows Server 2008,, click [Continue].
  • Access permissions in Windows Server 2008
  • Reader: A reader can only view shared files.
  • Contributor: A contributor can create, alter and delete shared files, but not alter access permissions.
  • Co-owner: A co-owner can perform all file operations including creating, altering, deleting shared files and altering access permissions.
  1. Click [Done] to close the [File Sharing] dialog box.

Sample destination setting:

  1. Set a destination address using the display.
  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
Computer name confirmed in step 3 in "Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008)"
<FILE PATH>: \share
Folder name created in step 1
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 4 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)."
<PASSWORD>: Password entered in step 6 in "Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008)."
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X)

Return to Overview

  • The following procedures are based on Mac OS X version 10.4. The procedures may differ depending on the versions of Mac OS X you are using.
  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator.
  1. Specify the user to whom you want to send data, and then the password.
  • Click the [Accounts] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click [] to create a new account.
  • Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  • Click [Create Account].
  • Close the [Accounts] window.
  1. Start the Windows Sharing services under Mac OS X.
  • Click the Apple icon in the top left of the screen → [System Preferences].
  • Click the [Sharing] icon in the [System Preferences] window.
  • Click to select the [Windows Sharing] → Click [Enable Accounts].
  • Click to select the user account created in step 2 → Click [Done].
  • Close the [Sharing] window.
  1. Create a folder to which files are to be sent under the home folder of the specified user.

Sample setting:

Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the home folder.

  1. Set a destination address using the operation panel.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
(set using the above procedure): Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the home folder of the user named "yoko," and then specify the iR_Folder as the folder to which files are sent.
  • The machine's destination settings:
The server protocol: <SMB>
<NAME>: The destination's name
<HOST NAME>: IP address of Macintosh
<FILE PATH>:

Enter an absolute path to a folder to which files are sent:
/Users/yoko/iR_Folder

<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in step 2
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for <FILE PATH> on the operation panel.
  • If you switch the language of the operation panel, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.


Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux)

Return to Overview


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use Samba. For details, consult your network manage.
  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser.
  1. Set up the users who access Samba shared folder, and their passwords.

Set a user name not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Set a destination address using the display.

Sample destination setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
  • The machine's destination settings:
<NAME>: The destination's name
The server protocol: <Windows (SMB)>
<HOST NAME>: \\swan (Double backslash "\\" can be omitted)
<FILE PATH>: \share
<LOGIN NAME>: User name entered in above step.
<PASSWORD>: Password for the above user
  • If you use <Windows (SMB): Browse> to specify each item, Use that after the expiration of the time specified in "Setting Startup Time." (the default setting startup time is <60 seconds>)
  • A maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered for both <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> on the display.
  • If you switch the language of the display, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the display differs from the computer on your network, <HOST NAME> and <FILE PATH> may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.


Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

This section describes procedures for Setting Up a computer for printing/sending a fax.


System Requirements

The following system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:

  • OS
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008
  • Computers
  • Windows; IBM PC/compatibles
  • Protocol
  • TCP/IP

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 or later.

Setup Procedures for Printing/Sending a Fax

Before setting up a computer for printing/sending a fax, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  1. Setup the network following to the explanation on "Basic Network Settings."
  1. Perform procedures described under "Setting and Checking the IP Address."
  1. Perform procedures described under "Network Connection."


Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax)

Return to Overview

You can select the printing method over a TCP/IP network.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE LPD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use LPD.

<ON>: Uses LPD as the print application.

  1. Confirm that <RAW SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use Raw. Skip to step 10.

<ON>: Uses Raw as the print application.

  1. Confirm that <USE BIDIRECTIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not establish bidirectional communication using Port 9100.

<ON>: Establishes bidirectional communication using Port 9100.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine, then turn on the power to restart the machine.


Setting Printer Connection Method (LPD/Raw)

Return to Overview

  • Connecting to a TCP/IP Network:

All computers that use the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  • Installing the Printer Driver and Specifying the Machine Destination Setting:

To print from a computer, you must install a printer driver and specify a setting for the machine destination. The machine destination setting differs depending on the print application used for printing. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.

  • LPD: This is the print application generally used with TCP/IP.
  • Raw: This is a print application used with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008. It can print at higher speeds than LPD.

Remark
  • In the following procedures, items displayed on the screen for Windows XP are used; items might differ depending on your operating system.
  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound].

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].

  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Properties].
  1. Display the [Ports] sheet by clicking the [Ports] tab.

  1. Open the [Printer Ports] dialog box by clicking [Add Port].
  1. From [Available ports types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.

  1. Click [Next].
  1. In [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the machine IP address or machine host name → click [Next].

After the computer has confirmed that there is a machine in which the entered IP address is assigned, the [Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window appears.

  1. Click [Finish].

If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next].

  1. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Ports] dialog box.
  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click [Configure Port] → Click [LPR] under [Protocol] → enter a print queue in [Queue Name] under [LPR Settings].

If you want to use Raw, confirm [Raw] under [Protocol] is selected, and proceed to step 11.

  • You can specify a print queue in [Queue Name]. The following three print queues are available:
    LP: The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally select this option.
    SPOOL: The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
    DIRECT: The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  1. Click [OK].
  1. Click [Close].


Setting Print Server

Return to Overview

If Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 is on your network, the following procedure enables you to set up a print server for more efficient management of network printers. Once a print server is set up, print jobs can be managed by the print server. Also, by setting up an alternate driver for the print server, printer drivers can be installed in each computer via the network.

  1. Open the printer properties dialog box.

For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers]

For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers].

For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes].

For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → Printers and Faxes].

  1. Right-click the icon of the printer you installed → select [Sharing].
  1. For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Change sharing options]

For other operating systems, skip to step 4.

  • Click [Continue] to proceed if the [User Account Control] dialog box appears.
  1. Select [Share this printer] (Windows 2000: [Shared as]) and enter a share name.
  1. If this machine is shared with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional drivers].

When the alternate driver is installed, additional windows will open for entering the location of the file containing the printer driver. Follow the instructions in these windows.

  • To install the printer driver on another computer, use the [Printer Wizard] window for selecting the printer destination → select [Network printer] → select the shared printer for the computer selected in the print server.
  1. Click [OK].

The shared printer settings are complete.



Additional Network Settings

Depending your network environment, additional network settings may be required.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.

Setting SNMP

Setting Startup Time

Setting Speed and Duplex

Setting Dedicated Port

Setting DNS

Controlling the Machine Access Using IP Addresses

Setting WINS

Setting PASV Mode for FTP

Setting FTP Extension

Setting the Use of HTTP

Setting Port Number

Setting Proxy

Limiting the Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address


Setting SNMP

Return to Overview

SNMP helps monitor the state of the machine and collects information on it. The following two items can be set:

<COMMUNITY NAME>:

Sets the SNMP community name. You can specify up to two community names.

<SNMP WRITABLE>:

Enables the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings if this item is activated. You can specify this setting for each community separately.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - and [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SNMP SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USE SNMP> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: When you set or browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP to obtain information.
<OFF>: When you do not use an SNMP utility.

  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <ON> for both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT>.
  1. Confirm that <COMMUNITY NAME 1> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the desired community name other than "public," using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. If you want to specify <COMMUNITY NAME2>, press [OK].

Otherwise, press [], then skip to step11.

  1. Enter the desired community name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SNMP WRITABLE 1> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. If you want to specify <SNMP WRITABLE 2>, press [OK].

Otherwise, skip to step15.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting Startup Time

Return to Overview

If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set correctly.
This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub. In this case, use the following procedure to delay the startup of network communication.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - and [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <STARTUP TIME SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Use [], [], or - [numeric keys] to set the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine, then press [OK].

You can enter the value from 0 to 300 (seconds).

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting Speed and Duplex

Return to Overview

You can specify the communication method and Ethernet connection type.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ETHERNET DRIVER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DETECT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired detection method, then press [OK].

<AUTO>: Automatically determines the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100Base-TX). Skip to step 11.

<MANUAL>: You have to manually specify the communication mode and Ethernet type.

  • If you reconnect the network cable (for example, reconnect the cable to a different Ethernet hub) with the main power on, the Auto Detect function will not work even if you set <AUTO DETECT> to <AUTO>. (Connect the cable with the main power off.)
  1. Confirm that <DUPLEX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired communication method, then press [OK].

<HALF DUPLEX>: Sends and receives alternately.

<FULL DUPLEX>: Sends and receives simultaneously.

  1. Confirm that <ETHERNET TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired Ethernet connection type, then press [OK].

<10 BASE-T>: Establish a 10Base-T network connection.

<100 BASE-TX>: Establish a 100Base-TX network connection.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting Dedicated Port

Return to Overview

To set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility, set <DEDICATED PORT> to <ON>.


Remark
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, select <ON> for both <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT>.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - and [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEDICATED PORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.

<OFF>: If you are not using a Canon printer driver or utility.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting DNS

Return to Overview

DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IP network) with a unique IP address.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DNS SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PRIMARY SERVER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address of a primary DNS server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SECONDARY SERVER> is displayed, then press [OK].

If the secondary DNS server address is not required, skip to step10.

  1. Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <HOST NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the desired host name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DOMAIN NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the network domain name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DNS DYNA. UPDATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: Enables the machine to register its IP address, host name, and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function is available in the environment where there is a dynamic DNS server.

<OFF>: Disables the DNS dynamic update function.

  • To use the DNS dynamic update function, enter the IP address of a DNS server, and the host name and domain name of the machine. (See step 5 to 13.)
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Controlling the Machine Access Using IP Addresses

Return to Overview

You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed/ forbidden to access the machine.


Remark
  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IP addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers on which items for the machine can be set or browsed, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IP addresses are not allowed; a utility on the computers cannot be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IP addresses of computers from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) can be sent to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IP addresses are not allowed.

Registering a Single IP Address to Prohibit

Registering a Range of IP Addresses to Prohibit

Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IP Addresses

Editing Registered IP Addresses

Deleting Registered IP Addresses


Registering a Single IP Address to Prohibit

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PERMIT/REJECT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SET IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 4>, then press [OK].

You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges.

  1. Confirm that <START IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the start IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <END IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the end IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Registering a Range of IP Addresses to Prohibit

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PERMIT/REJECT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REJECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SET IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 4>, then press [OK].

You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges.

  1. Confirm that <START IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the start IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <END IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the end IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IP Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PERMIT/REJECT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PERMIT>, then press [OK].
  • This setting is applied to all the IP address ranges set by the following procedures. You cannot specify the permit/reject setting for the individual IP address range.
  1. Confirm that <SET IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 4>, then press [OK].

You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges.

  1. Confirm that <START IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the start IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <END IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the end IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To specify only one IP address, enter the same address set to <START IP ADDRESS>.

To enter another IP address range, repeat step 10 to 14.

  • After specifying the <END IP ADDRESS> of <IP ADDRESS 4>, <RX MAC ADD SET.> is displayed. If you want to continue setting address ranges, perform the procedures from step 5.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Editing Registered IP Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the address range you want to edit from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 4>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <START IP ADDRESS> or <END IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the correct IP address using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To edit another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 10.

  • After specifying the <END IP ADDRESS> of <IP ADDRESS 4>, <RX MAC ADD SET.> is displayed. If you want to continue editing address ranges, perform the procedures from step 5.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Deleting Registered IP Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADD RANGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SET IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <IP ADDRESS 1> through <IP ADDRESS 4> which you want to delete, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <START IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address "0.0.0.0" using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <END IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address "0.0.0.0" using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To cancel another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 12.

  • After specifying the <END IP ADDRESS> of <IP ADDRESS 4>, <RX MAC ADD SET.> is displayed. If you want to continue deleting address ranges, perform the procedures from step 5.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting WINS

Return to Overview

WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service used for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a NetBIOS network) with a unique IP address.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONFIGURE WINS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <WINS RESOLUTION> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not resolve the name with WINS. Skip to step 10.

<ON>: Resolves the name with WINS.

  1. Confirm that <WINS SERVER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address of a WINS server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If DHCP determines the IP address, the IP address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IP address of a WINS server (obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting PASV Mode for FTP

Return to Overview

Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE PASV MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Disables the PASV mode for FTP.

<ON>: Enables the PASV mode for FTP.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting FTP Extension

Return to Overview

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. Set <FTP Extension> to <On>. Using imageWARE Document Manager and the Send function of the machine enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on imageWARE Document Manager, see the appropriate imageWARE Gateway documentation.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FTP EXTENSION>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Disables the FTP extension.

<ON>: Enables the FTP extension.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting the Use of HTTP

Return to Overview

You can restrict the use of Remote UI.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE HTTP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF> or <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not use the Remote UI.

<ON>: Uses the Remote UI.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting Port Number

Return to Overview

Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PORT NO.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the protocol of which you want to change the port number (LPD, RAW, HTTP, SMTP RX, POP3 RX, FTP SENDING, SMTP TX or SNMP), then press [OK].
  1. Enter the port number using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To enter the other port number, repeat step 6 to 7.

  • After specifying the port number of <SNMP>, <14. SET IP ADD RANGE> is displayed. If you want to continue setting port numbers, perform the procedures from step 5.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Setting Proxy

Return to Overview

Depending on your network environment, you can use a proxy server for HTTP transaction.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PROXY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USE PROXY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SERVER ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter a proxy server IP address or FQDN using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PORT NO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the port number of a proxy server using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USE SAME DOMAIN> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: Uses a proxy in the same domain.

<OFF>: Does not use a proxy in the same domain.

  1. If you want to use proxy authentication, confirm that <AUTH SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

Otherwise, press [Additional Functions] repeatedly until <PROXY SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then go to step 20.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USER> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the user name to use for proxy authentication using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password to use for proxy authentication using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Limiting the Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address

Return to Overview

You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the MAC addresses of the computers allowed/forbidden to access the machine.


Registering MAC Addresses to Allow

Editing Registered MAC Addresses

Deleting Registered MAC Addresses


Registering MAC Addresses to Allow

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MAC ADD SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Disables a MAC address filter. Skip to step 9.

<ON>: Enables a MAC address filter.

  • If you select <ON>, you will be unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified.
  1. Press [] or [] to select from <PERMIT RX ADD1> through <PERMIT RX ADD5>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the MAC addresses to allow access to using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

Repeat step 7 and 8 to specify other MAC addresses.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Editing Registered MAC Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MAC ADD SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the MAC address you want to edit from <PERMIT RX ADD1> through <PERMIT RX ADD5>, then press [OK].
  1. Specify the correct MAC addresses to allow access to using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

Repeat step 7 and 8 to edit other MAC addresses.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Deleting Registered MAC Addresses

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MAC ADD SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Managing the Machine

The machine also enables you to use any of the following software to check the status and to specify the settings on your computer.

  • Web browser (Remote UI)
  • NetSpot Device Installer (Canon utility software included in the User Software CD)

Machine Management Using Web Browser (Remote UI)

You can use Remote UI installed in the machine to manage it on a web browser.
For using Remote UI, see "Setting from a PC."


Machine Management Using NetSpot Device Installer

NetSpot Device Installer is utility software for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify the initial settings of network devices.
For instructions on how to use NetSpot Device Installer, see the online help for NetSpot Device Installer.



Security

This category describes the security functions of this machine.



Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager ID/password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.


Remark
  • Attaching the optional Card Reader-E1 erases the System Manager ID and System Password that have been stored.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYS. MANAGER INFO>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYS. MANAGER ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the System Manager ID using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You must set a System Manager ID to manage the operations of the machine.

  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot store a System Manager ID with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
  • Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the System Manager ID.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for System Password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot store a System Password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
  • Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM MANAGER>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the System Manager's name using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a character, press [Clear] to delete the character before the cursor position, then enter the correct character.
  • You can enter a maximum of 32 characters for the System Manager's name.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Device Information Settings

You can set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <DEVICE INFO>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DEVICE NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter a name (up to 32 characters) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <LOCATION> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the location of the machine (up to 32 characters) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Department ID Management

You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is called Department ID Management. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department. With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:

With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:


Remark
  • If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, Department ID Management is automatically activated.
 

Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Changing the Password and Page Limit

Erasing the Department ID and Password

Checking Counter Information

Clearing Page Totals

Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs


Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the number to which department will be designated, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the Department ID using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot register a Department ID with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
  • Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  • If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department ID.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • You cannot register a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
  • Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LIMIT SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN>, or <PRINT>.

  • <TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
  • The pages of received fax/I-fax documents and automatically printed reports are not counted as prints.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TOTAL> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11. Example: <RESTRICT COPY> appears when <COPY> is selected.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 16.
  • <ON>: Set a page limit restriction.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11.
Example: <COPY LIMIT> appears when <COPY> is selected.

  1. Enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
    The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Changing the Password and Page Limit

Return to Overview

You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.


Remark
  • Do not change the password when using a control card. The control card will become unusable if the password for the Department ID is changed.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the Department ID whose password and page limit you want to change, then press [OK] twice.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Clear] to clear the current password.
  1. Enter the new password using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You cannot change the Department ID.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LIMIT SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN>, or <PRINT>.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TOTAL> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11.
Example: <RESTRICT COPY> appears when <COPY> is selected.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not set a page limit restriction. Skip to step 17.
  • <ON>: Set a page limit restriction.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].

The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11.
Example: <COPY LIMIT> appears when <COPY> is selected.

  1. Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
  1. Enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing the Department ID and Password

Return to Overview

You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.


Remark
  • If Department ID Management is activated through the optional Card Reader-E1, you cannot delete the Department ID.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the Department ID that you want to erase, then press [OK] twice.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ERASE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not erase the selected Department ID and all of its settings.
  • <ON>: Erase the selected Department ID and all of its settings.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking Counter Information

Return to Overview

You can check how much paper was used by the each department.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].

If you select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, the counter information is deleted.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired function, then press [OK].

You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN> or <PRINT>.

  1. Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Clearing Page Totals

Return to Overview

You can clear the page totals made for all departments.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not clear the page totals.
  • <ON>: Clear the page totals.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST)

Return to Overview

You can print a list of how much paper was used by each department.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT LIST>, then press [OK].

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.



Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

Return to Overview

You can specify whether to accept or reject print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PDL JOBS W/OUT ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
  • <OFF>: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID, and you must insert a control card to operate the machine.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Managing User IDs

The User ID Management function enables you to register information for each of the User IDs, from 0001 to 1000.
You can set whether to use the User ID Management. The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • The User ID and password can be registered only from the Remote UI. For details about the User ID Management, see "Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer."
    You need to register the User ID and password before you set this mode to <ON>. One Department ID can be registered for each User ID.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE USER ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: User ID Management is enabled.
  • <OFF>: User ID Management is disabled.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Managing ID Cards

If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to operate it. The optional Card Reader-E1 performs Department ID Management automatically.


Remark
  • With the optional Card Reader-E1, the following settings can be specified:
  • If the standby display does not appear when the control card is inserted, make sure that:
  • The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
  • The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
  • An usable control card is inserted correctly.(You can not use the cards which are damaged or cards prohibited from use.)



Procedure before Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Insert the control card into the card slot, making sure that it is facing in the correct direction.

The standby display appears.



Procedure after Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.

The display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.

  • Once you have removed the control card, you cannot operate the machine until a control card is inserted again.


Flow of Additional Functions Operations

Return to Overview

This section describes the flow of Additional Functions operations when the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].


Changing the Password and Page Limit

Return to Overview

This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to check the print totals when the control card is being used.


Remark
  • The maximum number of digits that you can register for the password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine registers the password with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, then <0000321> is registered.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REGISTER DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the Department ID whose password and page limit you want to change, then press [OK].
  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PASSWORD>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Clear] to clear the current password.
  1. Use the numeric keys to enter the new password, then press [OK].

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password → enter the correct password.
  • You cannot change the Department ID.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE LIMIT SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Select the desired function.

  • If you want to change a restriction for the total number of prints and copies:

  • Press [] or [] to select <TOTAL PRINT>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT TOTAL> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].
  • <TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.

  • Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS> (when <TOTAL PRINT> is selected), then press [OK].

  • Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.

  • Use the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, then press [OK].
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If you want to change a page limit restriction for scanning:

  • Press [] or [] to select <SCAN>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to select <SCAN LIMIT> (when <SCAN> is selected), then press [OK].

  • Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.

  • Use the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, then press [OK].
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If you want to change a page limit restriction for printing:

  • Press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to select <PRINT LIMIT> (when <PRINT LIMIT> is selected), then press [OK].

  • Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.

  • Use the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of pages that can be made by the registered Department ID, then press [OK].
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card

Return to Overview

You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <VIEW PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Select the desired function.

  • If you want to view the counter information for prints and copies:

  • Press [] or [] to select <TOTAL PRINT>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If you want to view the counter information for copies:

  • Press [] or [] to select <COPY>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If you want to view the counter information for fax document scans:

  • Press [] or [] to select <SCAN>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If you want to view the counter information for prints:

  • Press [] or [] to select <PRINT>, then press [OK].

  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID, and check the counter information.
  • Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking and Printing Counter Information

Return to Overview

You can print a list of how much paper was used by the each department.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PRINT LIST>, then press [OK].

Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode.



Clearing Page Totals

Return to Overview

You can clear the page totals made for all departments.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <MANAGE DEPT. ID>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <PAGE TOTALS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Does not clear the page totals.
  • <ON>: Clear the page totals.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting the Remote UI

This section explains how to set a password for the Address Book, restrict the use of new addresses, set permissions for sending faxes from the fax driver, and confirm entered fax numbers.


Remark
  • If you want to cancel password protection, press [Clear] to clear the stored password after step 4.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - the numeric keys, then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <REMOTE UI>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting Access to Destinations

You can send the documents with following restrictions or settings.


Setting a Password for the Address Book

Restricting the New Address

Restricting PC Faxing

Confirming Entered Fax Numbers


Setting a Password for the Address Book

Return to Overview

If you set a password, the screen for entering the password appears when you attempt to edit the Address Book.


Remark
  • If you want to cancel password protection, press (Clear)→enter the correct number.
  • If you want to cancel password protection, press [Clear] to clear the stored password after step 4.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADD. BOOK PASSWOR>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter a password (seven digits maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password for confirmation using - , then press [OK].

If you enter a wrong password, you have to start over from the first entry.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting the New Address

Return to Overview

This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new destinations. When you set <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> to <ON>, the following are restricted:

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RESTRICT NEW ADD.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting PC Faxing

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to allow sending faxes from computers using the fax driver.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX DRIVER TX>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Confirming Entered Fax Numbers

Return to Overview

You can specify whether or not to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACCESS TO DEST.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONFIRM FAX NO.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: The confirmation screen appears when you enter a fax number using - [numeric keys].

<OFF>: The confirmation screen does not appear.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Checking the Job Log

You can specify whether or not to check the job log. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <ON>, you can check the job log using the System Monitor screen. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF>, the job log does not appear on the System Monitor screen.


Remark
  • When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF>, the Activity Report will not print automatically.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CHECKING THE LOG>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering a License

You must register a license key to enable optional modes and functions.

Each optional mode and function requires its own license key to be registered. There is no limit to the number of license keys that can be registered in the machine.


Remark
  • Registering a license key will make some optional functions available.
  • A license key can be obtained via a Web browser to access the license management system. Access the system by entering the following URL: http://www.canon.com/lms/license/. For more information on obtaining the license key, see the License Access Number Certificate and the License Registration Booklet included with the various optional kits.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press (Log In/Out).

  1. Press [] or [] to select <LICENSE REGISTRA.>, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the license key using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering number, press [Clear] or [] to delete the number before the cursor position, then enter the correct number.
  • If you want to delete the entire number when entering number, press and hold [Clear] to clear the entire number, then enter the correct number.

If the following screen is displayed, press [OK]. Enter the correct license key.

If the screen is displayed again, press [OK] and cancel license registration.

  • Check if the required option or function is properly installed in the machine.

If the messages <INSTALLATION OK> and <TURN POWER OFF/ON> appear, license registration is complete.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Restricting the USB Interface Port

You can restrict jobs through the USB interface.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - [numeric keys], then press [Log In/Out].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <USE DEVICE USB>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<ON>: The machine accepts jobs through the USB interface.

<OFF>: The machine does not accept jobs through the USB interface.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  1. Restart the machine.


Introduction of the Machine

Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.



Available Features

The procedures described in this manual are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some features described in the manuals may not be available. The table below shows the available features on a product basis.


: available
—: not available
opt.: optional

  Copy Print (UFRII LT) Print (PCL) Scan Fax I-Fax/ E-Mail/ FTP/ SMB RUI (Network Board) ADF
imageRUNNER 1025 opt. opt.
imageRUNNER 1025N opt.
imageRUNNER 1025iF opt.

The Card Reader-E1, Cassette Feeding Module-N2, and Barcode Printing Kit are available options.



Machine Components

External View (Front)

External View (Back)


External View (Front)

Return to Overview

Machine components vary depending on the model you purchased. For information on the standard features and available options for each model, see "Available Features."




1 ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Holds documents and feeds them automatically into the scanning area.
2 Slide guides
Adjusts to the width of the document.
3 Document feeder tray
Holds documents.
4 Document delivery tray
Receives documents.
5 Paper delivery tray
Receives copies, prints and faxes.
6 Paper stopper
Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray. Open the stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.
7 Operation panel
Machine controls.
8 Paper drawer*
Holds the paper supply.
*DRAWER 2 is the optional paper drawer.
9 Stacking support
Helps prevent paper curl on the output tray.
Open as far as it goes when using curl-prone paper.
10 Platen glass cover (imageRUNNER 1025 only)
Open this cover when placing a document on the platen glass.
11 Left cover
Open this cover when replacing the drum unit or clearing paper jams.
12 Scanning area
Scans documents from the ADF.

imageRUNNER 1025


13 Platen glass
Place documents.
14 Front cover
Open this cover to replace the toner bottle.
15 Stack Bypass
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper stacks.
16 Slide guides for stack bypass
Adjusts to the width of the paper.
17 Stack bypass extension
Pull out to load paper stack.


External View (Back)

Return to Overview

Machine components vary depending on the model you purchased. For information on the standard features and available options for each model, see "Available Features."


18 USB port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
19 Ethernet port
Connect the network cable.
20 Telephone line jack (imageRUNNER 1025iF only)
Connect the external telephone cable.
21 External device jack (imageRUNNER 1025iF only)
Connect an external device.
22 Power socket
Connect the power cord.
23 Main power switch
Turns the power on or off.


Operation Panel

Main Operation Panel

Send Operation Panel (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)


Main Operation Panel

Return to Overview


imageRUNNER 1025iF


imageRUNNER 1025/1025N


1 Paper Select indicator
Indicates the selected paper source.
* The number of paper sources varies depending on the model used.
2 Jam Location indicator
Indicates the location of paper jams.
3 Display
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays selection, text, and numbers when adjusting the settings.
4 COPY key
Press to switch to the Copy mode.
5 key
Press to decrease the value for various settings. Also press to see the previous item in the menu.
6 SEND key (imageRUNNER 1025iF only)
Press to switch to the Send mode.
7 OK key
Press to determine the contents you set or register.
8 SCAN key
Press to switch to the Scan mode.
9 key
Press to increase the value for various settings. Also press to see the next item in the menu.
10 Reset key
Press to return the machine to the standby mode.
11 System Monitor key
Press to check fax transmission, print, copy, or report output status.
12 View Settings key
Press to confirm settings of the copy function.
13 Numeric keys
Enter letters and numbers.
14 Clear key
Press to clear entered alphanumeric characters.
15 Log In/Out key
Press to operate the machine when the Department ID management is activated. Also press to enable the Department ID management when you finished using the machine.
16 Start key
Press to start copying, scanning and sending faxes.
17 Counter Check key
Press to display counter status. (Press again to close counter status.)
18 Stop key
Press to cancel machine operations.
19 Power key (operation panel power switch)
Press to turn the operation panel ON/OFF. Also press to enter the Sleep mode or to resume the normal mode from the Sleep mode manually.
20 Main Power indicator
Lights up when the main power is turned on.
21 Error indicator
Flashes or lights up when an error has occurred.
22 Processing/Data indicator
Flashes when the machine is working. Lights up when the machine has waiting jobs.
23 Tone key (imageRUNNER 1025iF only)
Press to switch from rotary pulse to tone dialing.
24 2 on 1 key
Press to set 2 on 1 copying.
25 Frame Erase key
Press to set frame erase for copying.
26 Collate key
Press to set collate copying.
27 Additional Functions key
Press to select or cancel modes in Additional Functions.
28 2-Sided key
Press to set two-sided copying or sending documents.
29 Copy Ratio key
Press to enlarge or reduce copy ratio.
30 Density key
Press to lighten or darken the copies or documents you send.
31 Image Quality key
Press to select image quality for copying and sending documents.
32 Paper Select key
Press to select a paper source (paper drawer or stack bypass).


Send Operation Panel (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview



1 Direct TX key
Press to set Direct Sending.
2 Pause key
Inserts a pause when entering a fax number.
3 Hook key
Press when you want to dial without lifting the handset of the external telephone.
4 Recall key
Press to recall previously set send jobs, including the destinations, scan settings, and send settings.
5 Coded Dial key
Press to specify destinations registered under coded dial codes.
6 Address Book key
Press to search preregistered destinations under one-touch keys or coded dial codes by name, number, or address.
7 One-Touch keys
Press to specify destinations registered under one-touch keys.
8 Favorites buttons
Press to specify destinations registered under favorites buttons.
9 Delayed TX key
Press to set Delayed Sending.
   


Display Parts and Functions

Depending on your needs, you can change the standby display which appears when the main power switch is turned on. For details, see "Machine Settings."


Copy Mode

Send Mode (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Scan Mode

Log In Mode

Remark
  • Log in mode is displayed only when <MANAGE DEPT. ID> or <MANAGE USER ID> is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. For details on the system settings, see "Security."


Copy Mode

Return to Overview

  • Without optional paper drawer


  • With optional paper drawer


1 Zoom ratio 2 Paper size
3 Quantity 4 Image quality
5 Density    


Send Mode (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview



Scan Mode

Return to Overview



Log In Mode

Return to Overview

If the Department ID Management or User ID Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed. For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management, see "Security."

  • For Department ID Management

Enter the Department ID and password, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out].

  • For User ID Management

Enter the User ID and password, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out].


Remark
  • Make sure to press [Log In/Out] after using the machine when the Department ID/User ID Management is set.
  • When the main power switch is turned on, the message <INITIALIZING...> is shown until the standby display appears.


Entering Characters

For displays that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters.
Example: Enter <Canon>. For details on entering characters, see "Information About the Keys," in the Quick Start Guide.

  1. Press repeatedly until an uppercase <C> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <a> appears.
  1. Press until an <n> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <o> appears.
  1. Press [] to move the cursor to the right, then press until an <n> appears.


Registering Destinations in the Address Book (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered information.


Remark
  • You can also register a destination in favorites buttons together with a specific combination of the scan and send settings. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be used for this feature. For instructions on registering favorites buttons, see "Favorites Buttons (Fax)," and "Favorites Buttons (I-Fax)."
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see "Exporting Address Book Entries."

Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys

Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys


Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys


Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys


Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys


Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys


Editing One-Touch Keys


Editing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses)


Adding a New Destination To Group


Deleting a Destination from Group


Changing a Group Name


Erasing One-Touch Keys


Erasing One-Touch Keys(Group Addresses)


Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes

Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes


Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes


Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes


Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes


Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes


Editing Coded Dial Codes


Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses)


Adding a New Destination To Group


Deleting a Destination from Group


Changing a Group Name


Erasing Coded Dial Codes


Erasing Coded Dial Codes(Group Addresses)



Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 23 destinations in one-touch keys, and 177 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 200 destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations of various types in a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this group. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job.


Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys

Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys

Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys

Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys

Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys

Editing One-Touch Keys

Editing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses)

Adding a New Destination To Group


Deleting a Destination from Group


Changing a Group Name


Erasing One-Touch Keys

Erasing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses)


Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the one-touch keys.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) for which you want to register the fax number, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number you register (120 digits maximum, including spaces and pauses) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <OPTIONAL SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <ECM> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> to reduce system and line errors while sending to or receiving from other machines that support ECM, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SPEED> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the sending speed (33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, or 4800 bps), then press [OK].
  • If transmission errors occur frequently, lower the speed.
  1. Confirm that <INTERNATIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the most effective transmission option, then press [OK].

<DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option.

<LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these options when you make an international call. If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>.

To register another one-touch key, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the one-touch keys.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <E-MAIL ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the address you register (120 digits maximum) with - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the one-touch keys.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <IFAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <I-FAX ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the address you register (120 digits maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the one-touch keys.


Remark
  • You cannot change the server protocol setting (FTP or SMB) of the destination registered in Address Book. To change the server protocol, cancel the registration once, then register with the correct server protocol again.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the server protocol (<FTP> or <SMB>), then press [OK].

<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 under Windows 2003 Server, Windows 2008 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0 under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.

<SMB>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server2008.

  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK]
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <HOST NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the name of the file server on the network (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.

  1. Confirm that <FILE PATH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the file path to the folder to which the job is to be sent (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <LOGIN NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name.

  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password.

To register another one-touch key, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys

Return to Overview

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single destination.


Remark
  • The destinations must be registered in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes beforehand.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select an empty one-touch key that you want to set as the group address, then press [OK]

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Select the destinations you want to register in the group (199 destinations maximum) until all destinations are registered, then press [OK].

To enter a destination stored under a one-touch key, press the desired one-touch key.

To enter a destination stored under a coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three digit code with the numeric keys. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.

  • You cannot register the destination stored under a favorites button in a group.
  • You can review the destinations which have been already entered with [] or [].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the group name (16 letters, including spaces maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4.

Ex.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Editing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for editing the fax, I-fax, e-mail and file server addresses in the one-touch keys.


Remark
  • You cannot change the server protocol setting (FTP or SMB) of the destination registered in Address Book. To change the server protocol, cancel the registration once, then register with the correct server protocol again.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can edit the following items:
Fax: <NAME>, <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <OPTIONAL SETTING>
I-Fax: <NAME>, <I-FAX ADDRESS>
E-Mail: <NAME>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>
File server (FTP or SMB): <NAME>, <HOST NAME>, <FILE PATH>, <LOGIN NAME>, <PASSWORD>

  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to the character or number you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new character or number with the - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

For editing the file server address, repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items, then go to step 11.

  1. Repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Editing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for adding a new destination to the group, deleting a destination from the group, or changing the group name registered in one-touch keys.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

For details about how to add a new destination, see "Adding a New Destination to Group."

For details about how to delete a destination from a group, see"Deleting a Destination from Group."

For details about how to change the group name, see "Changing a Group Name."

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adding a New Destination to Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Select the destination you want to add to the group, then press [OK].

For details on specifying a destination from Address Book, see "Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys."

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Deleting a Destination from Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to display the destination you want to delete from the group.
  1. Press [Clear].
  1. Repeat steps 6 and 7 if you want to delete another destination.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Changing a Group Name

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to a wrong character, then press (Clear).

To delete the entire name, press and hold (Clear).

  1. Enter a new character with - and [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing One-Touch Keys

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered under one-touch buttons.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <1-TOUCH SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a one-touch key (01 to 23) you want to erase, then press [OK].

You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, or <I-FAX ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold (Clear) to erase the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you erase the fax number or e-mail/I-fax address, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses)

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to delete, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Clear] repeatedly until all destinations are deleted, then press [OK].
  • When you delete all destinations, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 23 destinations in one-touch keys, and 177 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 200 destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations of various types in a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this group. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job.


Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes

Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Editing Coded Dial Codes

Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses)

Adding a New Destination To Group


Deleting a Destination from Group


Changing a Group Name


Erasing Coded Dial Codes

Erasing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses)

Remark
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see " Exporting Address Book Entries."


Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the coded dial codes.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) for which you want to register the fax number, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three digit code.

  1. Confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TEL NUMBER ENTRY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the fax number you want to register (120 digits maximum, including spaces and pauses) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK]
  1. Confirm that <OPTIONAL SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <ECM> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON> to reduce system and line errors while sending to or receiving from other machines that support ECM, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SPEED> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the sending speed (33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, or 4800 bps), then press [OK].
  • If transmission errors occur frequently, lower the speed.
  1. Confirm that <INTERNATIONAL> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the most effective transmission option, then press [OK].

<DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option.

<LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these options when you make an international call. If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>.

To register another coded dial code repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the coded dial codes.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <E-MAIL>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <E-MAIL ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the address you register (120 digits maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the coded dial codes.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <IFAX>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <I-FAX ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the address you register (120 digits maximum) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the coded dial codes.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) for which you want to register the address, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the server protocol (<FTP> or <SMB>), then press [OK].

<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 under Windows 2003 Server, Windows 2008 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0 under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.

<SMB>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server2008.

  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the destination's name (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <HOST NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the name of the file server on the network (16 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.

  1. Confirm that <FILE PATH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the file path to the folder to which the job is to be sent (120 characters maximum) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <LOGIN NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the login name using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name.

  1. Confirm that <PASSWORD> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password. To register another coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single destination.


Remark
  • The destinations must be registered in coded dial codes beforehand.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select an empty coded dial code that you want to set as the group address, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Select the destinations you want to register in the group (199 destinations maximum) until all destinations are registered, then press [OK].

To enter a destination stored under a coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three digit code with - [numeric keys]. For multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between each entry.

  • You cannot register the destination stored under a favorites button in a group.
  • You can review the destinations which have been already entered with [] or [].
  1. Confirm that <NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the group name (16 letters maximum, including spaces) using - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4.

Ex.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Editing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for editing the fax, I-fax, e-mail and file server addresses in coded dial codes.


Remark
  • You cannot change the server protocol setting (FTP or SMB) of the destination registered in Address Book. To change the server protocol, cancel the registration once, then register with the correct server protocol again.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Press [] or [] to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].

You can edit the following items:
Fax: <NAME>, <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <OPTIONAL SETTING>
I-Fax: <NAME>, <I-FAX ADDRESS>
E-Mail: <NAME>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>
File server (FTP or SMB): <NAME>, <HOST NAME>, <FILE PATH>, <LOGIN NAME>, <PASSWORD>

  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to the character or number you want to change, then press [Clear].

To delete the entire entry, press and hold [Clear].

  1. Enter a new character or number with the - [numeric keys], then press [OK].

For editing the file server address, repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items, then go to step 11.

  1. Repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses)

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for adding a new destination to the group, deleting a destination from the group, or changing the group name registered in the coded dial codes.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using - [numeric keys].

For details about how to add a new destination, see "Adding a New Destination to Group."

For details about how to delete a destination from a group, see "Deleting a Destination from Group."

For details about how to change the group name, see "Changing a Group Name."

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Adding a New Destination to Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Select the destination you want to add to the group, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Deleting a Destination from Group

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to display the destination you want to delete from the group.
  1. Press [Clear].
  1. Repeat steps 6 and 7 if you want to delete another destination.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Changing a Group Name

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to edit, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] repeatedly to go back to a wrong character, then press (Clear).

To delete the entire name, press and hold (Clear).

  1. Enter a new character with -[numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing Coded Dial Codes

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered under one-touch buttons.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <CODED SPD DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a coded dial code (000 to 176) for which you want to erase, then press [OK].

You can also select a coded dial code by pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired three-digit code.

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, or <I-FAX ADDRESS> or <HOST NAME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press and hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry, then press [OK].
  • If you delete the fax number or e-mail/I-fax address, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  • If you erase the file server name, the rest of the settings are cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Erasing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses)

Return to Overview

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].

If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using [numeric keys], then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <GROUP DIAL>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select a group to delete, then press [OK].

To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the three-digit code using the numeric keys.

  1. Confirm that <SELECT ADD/TEL NO> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Clear] repeatedly until all destinations are deleted, then press [OK].
  • When you delete all destinations, the registered name is cleared automatically.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Toner Cartridge

If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the display, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Use only the toner cartridges recommended for use with this machine.


Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

Remark
  • Never dispose toner cartridges in a fire or incinerator, as this may result in an explosion.
  • Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
  • Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
  • When removing a used toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
  • When discarding used toner cartridges, put the cartridges into a case to prevent the toner remaining inside the cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away from open flames.


Maintaining the Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview

  • Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight.

– The recommended storage conditions are: temperature below 86 °F (30 °C), and humidity below 80%.

  • Never store the cartridges in a vertical position.

Genuine Supplies

Canon has developed and manufactured Toner, Parts, and Supplies specifically for use in this machine. For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner, Parts, and Supplies.
Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies.

  • Be careful of counterfeit toners

Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of non-genuine Canon toner or counterfeit toner.

For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.



Placing Originals

On the Platen Glass

In the ADF


On the Platen Glass

Return to Overview

  1. Lift up the ADF/platen glass cover.
  1. Place your original face down.
  1. Align the original with the appropriate paper size marks.

If your original does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your original with the arrow mark.

  1. Gently lower the ADF/platen glass cover.

The original is ready for scanning.

  • When closing the ADF/platen glass cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Do not press down the ADF/platen glass cover forcefully, as this may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
  • Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.


In the ADF

Return to Overview

  1. Fan the originals stack and even the edges.
  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the originals.
  1. Neatly place the originals face up in the originals feeder tray.

The originals are ready for scanning.

  • Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the document delivery tray to avoid paper jams.
  • Avoid using ADF to scan the same originals more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, originals can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams.
  • If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written in pencil, clean them. (See "Cleaning the Machine.")


Loading Paper

In the Paper Drawer

In the Stack Bypass


In the Paper Drawer

Return to Overview

  1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

If you use LTR size, go to step 4. If you use other sizes, go to step 2.

  1. Incline the rear paper end guide until it is unlocked, then remove it from the paper drawer.
  • By default, the guide is set to LTR.
  1. Attach the guide to the slots of the desired paper size.
  • Make sure to set the guide to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guide is positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
  1. Even the edges of the paper stack.
  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up.
  • When loading paper, be careful not to cut your fingers on the edges of the paper.
  • Make sure the back edge of the paper stack touches the rear paper end guide (A), the paper stack should not exceed the load limit mark (B), and the load is under the small fins (C) on the paper guides.
  • The paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of paper (22 lb bond (80 g/m2)).

  1. Gently insert the paper drawer as far as it will go.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.

In the same manner, load the paper into the optional paper drawer. For attaching the optional paper drawer, see the instruction sheet that comes with the optional paper drawer.

For details on loading paper in the stack bypass, see "In the Stack Bypass."



In the Stack Bypass

Return to Overview

If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard size paper, or envelopes, load them into the stack bypass.


Remark
  • Note the following points when you are making prints on envelopes:
  • Use standard envelopes with diagonal seams and flaps.
    To prevent jams, do not use the following:
    To prevent jams
    • Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or double flaps
    • Envelopes made with special coated paper or deeply embossed paper
    • Envelopes with peel-off sealing strips
    • Envelopes with letters enclosed
  • Make sure to set the correct envelope size in the printer driver. (See "Printing Functions.")
 
  1. Open the stack bypass.
  1. Pull out the stack bypass extension until it clicks, then open it.
  • Do not load the paper without using the stack bypass extension.
  1. Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.
  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass.

Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.


  • To print on the back side of preprinted paper:
  • Load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass, as shown in the illustration below.

  • When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass, the side facing down is the one printed on.

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

  • Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper limit guide.
  • Some types of paper may not feed properly into the stack bypass. For high quality copies, be sure to use the paper and transparencies recommended by Canon.
  • When making copies of a small document or thick paper, etc., the copy speed may be slightly slower than usual.
  • If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
  • If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and reload it.

  • If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass:
  • Gently load the stack of envelopes with the address side facing down and the flap side to the left. Be sure to insert the envelopes as far as they will go. When you load the envelopes, arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm, clean surface first, then press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp.



  1. Adjust the slide guides to the width of the paper stack.
  • Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper limit guide.
  • Some types of paper may not feed properly into the stack bypass. For high quality copies, be sure to use the paper and transparencies recommended by Canon.
  • When making copies of a small document or thick paper, etc., the copy speed may be slightly slower than usual.


Setting Paper Type and Size

For the Paper Drawer

For the Stack Bypass


For the Paper Drawer

Return to Overview

The default settings are <PLAIN PAPER> and <LTR>. When you place other types and/or sizes of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SELECT PAPER TYPE>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DRAWER 1> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>

If you use the optional paper drawer, confirm that <DRAWER 2> is displayed and press [OK]. Then repeat this step to set the paper type for <DRAWER 2>.

  1. Confirm that <REG. PAPER SIZE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DRAWER 1> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <LGL>, <OFICIO>, <FLSP>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <A4>

If you use the optional paper drawer, confirm that <DRAWER 2> is displayed and press [OK]. Then repeat this step to set the paper size for <DRAWER 2>.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


For the Stack Bypass

Return to Overview

You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass. The default setting of standard settings for stack bypass is <OFF>.

To print using the stack bypass, follow this procedure to specify the paper size and type.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BYPASS STD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  • If you select <OFF>, you must specify paper size and type every time you load paper on the stack bypass. When the display to specify the paper size for the stack bypass appear, press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK]. Consequently, press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PAPER SIZE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <COM10>*1, <MONARCH>*1, <DL>*1, <ISO-C5>*1, <ISO-B5>*1, <FREESIZE>*2, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <LGL>

*1 For envelopes.
If you select this size, <ENVELOPE> is automatically selected for the paper type, and the display for selecting the paper type does not appear. Skip to step 9.

*2 For non-standard paper size.
If you select this size, enter the vertical size in <VERTICAL SIZE> (76 to 216 mm (3 to 8 1/2 inch)) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].
Enter the horizontal size in <HORIZONTAL SIZE> (127 to 356 mm (5 to 14 1/8 inch)) with the numeric keys, then press [OK].

You can also press [] or [] to specify the size.
(<VERTICAL SIZE> represents the length of the paper that feeds into the machine.)

  1. Confirm that <SELECT PAPER TYPE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types:

<PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Tone Volume

This section describes how to adjust the tones that the machine sounds during operation or fax transmission.


Setting the Audible Tones


Setting the Audible Tones

Return to Overview

The default settings are:

  • ENTRY TONE: ON (1)
  • ERROR TONE: ON (1)
  • TX JOB DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (1)
  • RX JOB DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (1)
  • SCAN DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (1)
  • PRINT DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (1)

Remark
  • The menus described above are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Available settings vary depending on the model of your machine.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <AUDIBLE TONES>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select an audible tone you want to specify, then press [OK].

You can specify the following audible tones:

  • <ENTRY TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
  • <ERROR TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when an error (e.g., a paper jam) occurs.
  • <TX JOB DONE TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when a document is sent.
  • <RX JOB DONE TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when a document is received.
  • <SCAN DONE TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when scanning is completed.
  • <PRINT DONE TONE>: Adjust the tone that beeps when printing is completed.
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select [ON] or [OFF] (some settings have [ERROR ONLY] as an option), then press [OK].
  • <OFF>: Turns off the tone. Skip to step 7.
  • <ON>: Turns on the tone. Proceed to step 6.
  • <ERROR ONLY>:The tone beeps only when an error occurs. Proceed to step 6.
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to specify the tone volume, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting the Date and Time

This section describes how to set the current date and time, the time zone in which the machine is used, and the daylight saving time.


Setting the Current Date and Time

Setting the Time Zone

Setting the Date Type

Setting the Sleep Mode

Setting the Auto Clear Time

Setting the Daylight Saving Time


Setting the Current Date and Time

Return to Overview

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DATE&TIME SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-hour format) using [numeric keys], then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Time Zone

Return to Overview

The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIME ZONE SETTING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the time zone, then press [OK].

The default setting is 'GMT-5:00'.

  • Eastern time (US/Canada): GMT-5:00
  • Central time (US/Canada): GMT-6:00
  • Mountain time (US/Canada): GMT-7:00
  • Pacific time (US/Canada): GMT-8:00
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • The specified time zone setting becomes effective after the machine is restarted.


Setting the Date Type

Return to Overview

You can select the format of the date to be displayed. The default setting is <MM/DD/YYYY>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <DATE TYPE SELECT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the date type you want to specify, then press [OK].
  • <MM/DD/YYYY>: Displays the date in month, day, year format.
  • <DD/MM YYYY>: Displays the date in day, month, year format.
  • <YYYY MM/DD>: Displays the date in year, month, day, format.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting the Sleep Mode

Return to Overview

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode. The default settings are <ON> and <5MIN.>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO SLEEP TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <ON> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired interval, then press [OK].

You can set the interval from 3 to 30 minutes (in one-minute increments).
You can also enter values using numeric keys.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • To resume the normal mode from the Sleep mode, press [Power] on the operation panel.
  • To enter the Sleep mode manually, press [Power] on the operation panel.
  • The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when:
  • the machine is in operation
  • a system error occurs
  • a paper jam occurs in the machine
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook*
  • The machine will leave the Sleep mode when:
  • you press [Power] on the operation panel
  • a computer performs a scan through the machine
  • the handset of the external telephone is off the hook*
  • a print job is sent from a computer, and the print is started

    *Only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF


Setting the Auto Clear Time

Return to Overview

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear function). This section describes how to set the period of time until the display returns to the standby mode. The default setting is <2MIN.>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <AUTO CLEAR TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <ON> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the desired interval, then press [OK].

You can set the interval from 1 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).
You can also enter values using numeric keys.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Setting the Daylight Saving Time

Return to Overview

In some countries or are as, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This section describes how to set the Daylight Saving Time. This is called "Daylight Saving Time." The default setting is <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DAYLIGHT SV.TIME>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <START DATE/TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MONTH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <WEEK> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DAY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <END DATE/TIME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <MONTH> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the month, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <WEEK> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the week, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DAY> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the day, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Customizing Settings

You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Print, Send, and Fax functions.


Setting the Initial Function

Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates

Setting the Toner Save Mode

Adjusting the Print Density

Enabling the Inch Entry

Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching

Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

Changing the Language Shown on the Display

Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults


Setting the Initial Function

Return to Overview

You can select which standby display appears when turning ON the power.

The default setting is <COPY> standby screen.


Remark
  • The menus described are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Available settings vary depending on the model of your machine.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <DEFAULT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COPY>, <SEND>, or <SCAN>, then press [OK].
  • <COPY>: Copy standby screen displays when turning ON the power.
  • <SEND>: Send standby screen displays when turning ON the power.
  • <SCAN>: Scan standby screen displays when turning ON the power.
  • Setting options vary depending on the model or system configuration of your machine.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates

Return to Overview

You can select which standby display appears after the Auto Clearing function is activated.

The default setting is <INITIAL FUNCTION>.


Remark
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <AUTO CLEAR SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <INITIAL FUNCTION> or <SELECTED FUNCTION>, then press [OK]
  • <INITIAL FUNCTION>: Sets to return standby display that is selected in <DEFAULT SETTINGS>.
  • <SELECTED FUNCTION>: Sets to return standby display of the current mode.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting the Toner Save Mode

Return to Overview

You can set the toner consumption for printing. The default setting is <OFF>.

If the Toner Save mode is set to <ON>, print quality may be affected. If you notice a degradation in print quality, set this mode to <OFF>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TONER SAVER MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: Activates the toner savor mode.
  • <OFF>: Deactivates the toner savor mode.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Adjusting the Print Density

Return to Overview

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either automatically or manually.


  • Adjusting Automatically
  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] to select <AUTO DENSITY>, then press [OK].
  • The image quality is automatically set to <TEXT>.

  • Adjusting Manually
  1. Press [COPY].
  1. Press [Density] twice to select the manual mode.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].
  • []: to make light documents darker
  • []: to make dark documents lighter


Enabling the Inch Entry

Return to Overview

If you set <MM/INCH ENTRY> to <INCH> in <COPY SETTINGS> (from the Additional Functions screen), you can enter values in inches when using the frame erase function. The default entry mode for numeric values is inches, but you can change it to millimeters by turning the Inch Entry mode <MM>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COPY SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <MM/INCH ENTRY>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <INCH>, or <MM>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching

Return to Overview

You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching. This setting can be made independently for all functions of the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different paper sources for different purposes.

The default settings are <OFF> for the stack bypass and <ON> for the paper drawers.


Remark
  • Paper sources set to <ON> are used for the following functions:
  • APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper source) based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).
  • ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <AUTO DRAWER SELCT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the functions you want to set the Automatic Paper Selection, then press [OK].
  • <COPY>: Sets whether to activate the Automatic Paper Selection when copying.
  • <PRINTER>: Sets whether to activate the Automatic Paper Selection when printing.
  • <RECEIVE>: Sets whether to activate the Automatic Paper Selection when receiving fax/I-fax document.
  • <OTHER>:Sets whether to activate the Automatic Paper Selection when printing a report or list.
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2> or <STACK BYPASS>, then press [OK].
  • <DRAWER 2> is displayed only if the optional paper drawer is attached.
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <ON>, or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: Activates the Automatic Paper Selection.
  • <OFF>: Deacitivates the Automatic Paper Selection.
  • Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select <OFF> for all of the paper sources at the same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack bypass must be set to <ON>.
  • If you selected <PRINTER> in step 5, <STACK BYPASS> does not appear on the Auto Drawer Selection screen.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

Return to Overview

You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode. If you set the power consumption to <LOW>, the machine consumes less energy during the Sleep mode than when you set it to <HIGH>. However, it takes more time for the machine to resume normal operation.


Remark
  • If there is less time than specified in <AUTO SLEEP TIME> remaining before sending a job which has been reserved for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via the network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely if SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your computer is turned OFF). For more information on disabling SNMP Status, contact your network administrator.
  • The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is <HIGH> even when the energy consumption level is set to <LOW> when a job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job, and sending a forwarding done notice).
  • The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is <HIGH> even if the energy consumption level is set to <LOW>, when any of the following settings are set in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> of the Additional Functions menu:
  • <MEMORY RX TM> in <MEMORY LOCK> of <COMMUNICATION> is set to <ON>*.
  • <DHCP> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> of <NETWORK SETTINGS> is set to <ON>.
  • <USE SMB CLIENT> in <SMB SETTINGS> of <NETWORK SETTINGS> is set to <ON>.
  • <POP INTERVAL> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> of <NETWORK SETTINGS> is set to more than <1MIN>.

    *If there is more time than specified in <AUTO SLEEP TIME> remaining before the set time limit is reached, the machine consumes the same amount of energy as when the energy consumption level is set to <LOW>.
  • The default setting is <LOW>.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ENERGY IN SLEEP>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <HIGH> or <LOW>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to retrun to the standby mode.


Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

Return to Overview

You can set whether the printer speed is the priority for your job, or whether to print on a specific side of the paper. This is useful when you want to make one or two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper loaded in a paper source. The default setting is <SPEED PRIORITY>.


Remark
  • When using preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) whose orientation is important, it is recommended that you set <PRINT SIDE> for the paper source which is loaded with that paper.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <PAPER FEED SWITCH>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <STACK BYPASS>, <DRAWER 1>, or <DRAWER 2>, then press [OK].
  • <DRAWER 2> is displayed only if the optional paper drawer is attached.
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <SPEED PRIORITY> or <PRINT SIDE>, then press [OK].

<SPEED PRIORITY>: When you feed one or two-sided prints into the machine, the method for delivering paper inside the machine changes, and this affects the printing speed. Therefore, to maximize the printing speed, load the paper manually as follows:

  • One-Sided Prints: Load the paper face up in a paper drawer, or face down into the stack bypass. The side facing up in the paper drawer, and the side facing down in the stack bypass are the sides printed on.
  • Two-Sided Prints: Load the paper face down in a paper drawer, or face up in the stack bypass. The side facing down in the paper drawer, and the side facing up in the stack bypass are the first sides that are printed on.

<PRINT SIDE>: If you load paper in a paper drawer and select <PRINT SIDE>, no matter whether you are printing one or two-sided prints, the side of the paper facing up is always the one printed on first. (The side facing down is the one printed on first for the stack bypass.) facing up. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided print.

  • <PRINT SIDE> can be selected only for LTR, LGL and A4.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Changing the Language Shown on the Display

Return to Overview

You can change the language displayed on the display and printed on reports. The default setting is <ENGLISH>.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the language on the display, then press [OK].

You can select a language from among: <ENGLISH>, <FRENCH>, <SPANISH>, and <PORTUGUESE>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

Return to Overview

You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults.


Remark
  • If you change the language shown on the display in the <DISPLAY LANGUAGE> setting, and return the Common Settings to their default settings, the language on the display and reports remains unchanged. (For instruction on how to set the language on the display, see "Changing the Language Shown on the Display.")
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <INIT.COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, or <OFF>, then press [OK].
  • <ON>: Restores all <COMMON SETTINGS> to the default except for <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>.
  • <OFF>: Does not restores the <COMMON SETTINGS> to the default.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Summary of Reports and Lists

The machine prints the following reports and lists.

  • 1-TOUCH LIST: Lists the recipient addresses registered to all the one-touch keys.
  • 1-TOUCH LIST 2: Lists the detailed data of [1-TOUCH LIST].
  • CODED DIAL LIST: Lists the recipient addresses registered to all the coded dial codes.
  • CODED DIAL LIST 2: Lists the detailed data of [CODED DIAL LIST].
  • GROUP DIAL LIST: Lists groups registered for group addresses.
  • USER'S DATA LIST: Lists all the current settings and registered sender information. For information on how to print this list, see "Printing User's Data List."
  • DEPT. INFO LIST: Lists the Department IDs, page totals of scans, prints, and copies that have been processed by each department, and page limits of scans, prints, and copies that can be processed.
  • ACTIVITY REPORT: Shows the last 40 transactions performed by the machine. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "Activity Report."
  • TX REPORT: Shows the transmission result. Can be set to print automatically. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "TX Report."
  • RX REPORT: Shows the reception result. Can be set to print automatically. For information on how to print this report automatically, see "RX Report."


Printing Reports Automatically

TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically.


TX Report

RX Report

Activity Report


TX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set TX reports to print automatically. The default setting is <PRINT ERROR ONLY>.

The following items are printed in a TX REPORT:

  • REPORT NAME: When the document transmission is completed successfully, a "TX Report" is printed. When a send error occurs, an "Error TX Report" is printed.
  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Destination number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Destination name registered in the Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Transmission start time
  • TIME USE: Transmission duration
  • PAGES SENT: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Transmission successful
  • NG: Transmission failed
  • STOP: Transmission manually canceled before completion
  • BUSY/NO SIGNAL: The line is busy or the recipient does not answer your call
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX REPORT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document.
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7.

  1. Confirm that <REPORT WITH TX IMAGE> is displayed, press [] or [] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Does not print the first page.

<ON>: Prints the first page.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


RX Report

Return to Overview

This section describes how to set RX reports to print automatically. The default setting is <OFF>.

The following items are printed in an RX REPORT:

  • Transaction description
  • TX/RX NO: Transaction number
  • RECIPIENT ADDRESS: Recipient's number or address
  • DESTINATION ID: Sender's name registered in Address Book
  • ST. TIME: Reception start time
  • TIME USE: Reception duration
  • PGS.: Number of pages received
  • RESULT: Result of transaction
  • OK: Reception successful
  • NG: Reception failed
  • STOP: Reception manually canceled before completion
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX REPORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report.
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Activity Report

Return to Overview

The following items are displayed in the ACTIVITY REPORT:

  • DEPT. ID: If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
  • ST. TIME: Transmission time
  • DESTINATION TEL/ID: Destination name and fax number/address
  • NO.: Transaction number
  • MODE: Transaction, Error correction mode
  • PGS.: Number of pages sent
  • RESULT: Result of transaction, transaction duration
  • OK: Transaction successful
  • NG: Transaction failed
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <AUTO PRINT> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions.

<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9.

  1. Confirm that <TX/RX SEPARATE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the setting you want, then press [OK].

<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically.
<ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Printing Reports and Lists Manually

You can print the following lists manually.

  • Activity Report
  • Speed Dial List
  • Address Book List
  • User's Data List

Printing an Activity Report

Printing a Speed Dial List

Printing an Address Book Details List

Printing a User's Data List


Printing an Activity Report

Return to Overview

An Activity Report is automatically printed every 40 transactions. Activity Reports can also be printed manually. For information about the Activity Reports and instructions on how to set to print Activity Reports automatically, see "Activity Report."

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT>, then press [OK].

An ACTIVITY REPORT is printed out and the display returns to standby mode.



Printing a Speed Dial List

Return to Overview

You can print lists of destinations registered in Address Book.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <SPEED DIAL LIST>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <1-TOUCH LIST>, <CODED DIAL LIST>, or <GROUP DIAL LIST>, then press [OK].
  • <1-TOUCH LIST>: Prints a list of recipient addresses registered to all the one-touch keys.
  • <CODED DIAL LIST>: Prints a list of recipient addresses registered to all the coded dial codes.
  • <GROUP DIAL LIST>: Prints a list of groups registered for group addresses.

The selected Speed Dial List is printed out and the display returns to standby mode.



Printing an Address Book Details List

Return to Overview

You can print detailed lists of Address Book.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <ADD BOOK DETAILS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <1-TOUCH (DETAILS)> or <CODED (DETAILS)>, then press [OK].
  • <1-TOUCH (DETAILS)>: Prints a detailed data of [1-TOUCH LIST].
  • <CODED (DETAILS)>: Prints a detailed data of [CODED DIAL LIST].

The selected Address Book Details List is printed out and the display returns to standby mode.



Printing a User's Data List

Return to Overview

A User's Data List enables you to check the machine settings.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <USER DATA LIST>, then press [OK].

A USER'S DATA LIST is printed out and the display returns to standby mode.



UFR II LT Printer Driver

The Canon UFR II LT printer driver enables users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by this printer driver have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide).

This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver.

Using the UFRII LT printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization. You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.


Remark
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows you are using.
  • For information on the machines supported by the UFRII LT printer drivers, see Canon Products Supported by UFRII Drivers.


PCL Printer Driver (Optional)

The Canon PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by these printer drivers have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide.)

This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver.

The PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers.


Remark
  • To use the PCL printer function with imageRUNNER 1025/1025N/1025iF, the optional PCL Printer Kit is required.
  • The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.
  • For information on the machines supported by the PCL5c, and PCL5e, PCL6 printer drivers, see Canon Products Supported by PCL Drivers.


FAX Driver (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

The fax driver gives users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista (hereafter called Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista) operating system the ability to make full use of the fax function of the printer. If your printer is equipped with the optional fax subsystem, the fax driver enables you to access the fax function.

The fax driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user would select [Print] from any Windows application software, select the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specify its destination(s) and options.

The fax driver would then convert this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).



Department/User ID Management

If Department ID Management is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, you must enter your Department ID and password to be able to operate the machine.


Procedure before Using the Machine

Procedure after Using the Machine


Procedure before Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Enter the Department ID with the numeric keys, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out].
  1. Enter the password with the numeric keys, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out].

The standby display appears.



Procedure after Using the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Make sure to press [Log In/Out].


Setting Up the Machine

This chapter describes the settings before using the machine.



Set Up the Machine to Suit Your Purposes

Determine which machine functions (Copy, Fax, Scan, PC Print, PC Fax, Remote UI, E-Mail, I-Fax, Scan to File Server) you intend to use, and make the settings according to the flowchart below.
For example, if you intend to use only the Copy function, it is necessary to make only "Machine Settings." If you intend to use the PC Print and Fax functions in addition to the Copy function, the "Machine Settings," "Fax Settings," and "Computer Setting" are required.



Set Up the Machine

Items Included with the Machine

Install Toner Cartridge

Install Drum Unit

Set Up Paper Drawer and Load Paper

Connect Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine

Set Date and Time


Items Included with the Machine

Return to Overview


  • Machine

  • Drum Unit

  • Power Cord

  • Telephone Cable*1

  • Ferrite Core for USB Cable*2

  • Destination Labels*1

  • Limited Warranty Notice
  • Drum Unit Warranty Notice
  • Installation Checklist
  • Registration Card
  • Unpacking Instruction Sheet
  • Quick Start Guide
  • Basic Operation Guide
  • User Software CD-ROM
  • Manual CD-ROM

*1 imageRUNNER 1025iF only
*2 imageRUNNER 1025N and 1025iF only

  • Optional Items
  • Cassette Feeding Module-N2

  • Manuals for the Machine

  • Quick Start Guide:
    The Quick Start Guide contains the machine setup and software installation. Read this guide before operating this product.
  • Basic Operation Guide:
    The Basic Operation Guide contains the basic operation features.
  • e-Manual (located on the Manual CD-ROM)(This Document):
    The e-Manual is a web browser-based manual that you can see on your computer. This guide contains total operation features. (Also includes the Quick Start Guide contents and the Basic Operation Guide contents.)


Install Toner Cartridge

Return to Overview

This section describes the installation procedure for the toner cartridge.

  • A toner cartridge is not included with the machine.
  1. Remove the plastic case from the box.
  1. Open the case and remove the toner cartridge.
  • Keep the box and case for future use.
  • Do not touch the portions (A) and (B).
  • Do not pull out the seal (C) before inserting the cartridge into the machine as the toner may spill out.

  1. Open the front cover.
  1. Pull the toner cartridge lever (A) towards you and insert the cartridge into the machine with the arrow (B) pointing towards the machine.
  1. Holding the cartridge steady with one hand, pull out the seal completely with the other hand.
  • If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be careful that your hands or clothes do not get dirty from touching the toner.
  • If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently.
  • Do not pull out the seal at an angle.
  1. Turn the cartridge lever (A) as far as it will go counterclockwise.
  1. Push down the lever.
  1. Close the front cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the front cover, do not force it to close. Open the front cover and pull out the toner cartridge, then reinsert the cartridge into the machine.


Install Drum Unit

Return to Overview

This section describes the installation procedure for the drum unit.

  1. Open the left cover.
  1. Open the package of the new drum unit and remove the protective packing material (A).
  1. Hold the unit by its grips on both sides.
  1. Align the marks on both sides of the drum unit (B) with the marks on the machine (A), and push the unit into the machine as far as it will go.
  1. After the unit is completely inserted, remove the orange paper.
  • Do not touch the portion (A) as the image quality of printouts may deteriorate.Hold the unit by its grips on both sides.

  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


Set Up Paper Drawer and Load Paper

Return to Overview

  1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

If you use LTR size, go to step 4. If you use other sizes, go to step 2.

  • Make sure all shipping tape/packing materials on the machine have been removed.
  1. Incline the rear paper end guide until it is unlocked, then remove it from the paper drawer.
  • By default, the guide is set to LTR.
  1. Attach the guide to the slots of the desired paper size.
  • Make sure to set the guide to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guide is positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
  1. Even the edges of the paper stack.
  1. Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up.
  • When loading paper, be careful not to cut your fingers on the edges of the paper.
  • Make sure the back edge of the paper stack touches the rear paper end guide (A), the paper stack should not exceed the load limit mark (B), and the load is under the small fins (C) on the paper guides.

  • The paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of paper (21 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
  1. Gently insert the paper drawer as far as it will go.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • In the same manner, load the paper into the optional paper drawer. For attaching the optional paper drawer, see the instruction sheet that comes with the optional paper drawer.


Connect the Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine

Return to Overview

  1. Connect the power cord to the rear socket on the back side of the machine and to the wall outlet, and press the [I] side of the main power switch (A) to ON.
  • Do not connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable at this time. Connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable only during the software installation procedure.
  • If you want to use the optional paper drawer, attach the Cassette Feeding Module-N2 to the machine before turning ON the machine. (For instructions on how to attach the Cassette Feeding Module-N2, see the instruction sheet that comes with the Cassette Feeding Module-N2.)
  1. The machine enters the standby mode.

  • Without optional drawer


  • With optional drawer


Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • The display turned off:The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back on and continue the setup.
  • <CLOSE COVER/FRONT OR LEFT COVER> is displayed:
  • <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> is displayed:
  • <DRUM IS NOT SET/INSERT THE DRUM> is displayed:
  • <LOAD PAPER> is displayed:


Set Date and Time

Return to Overview

Before using the machine, you MUST set the current date and time. The date and time set are used as a standard for timer settings functions.

  • Information About the Keys
  • Use - [numeric keys] to enter numbers.
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor position.
  • Press [OK] to set the entry and to proceed to the next screen.
  • Press [Clear] to delete entire entry.


Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • If the display turned off: The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TIMER SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <DATE & TIME SETTING> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the date (month/ day/ year) and time (in 24-hour/ military time format) using -, then [OK].

Enter the month, day and year using two digits (including zeros).
Enter the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) without a space.
Examples:
May 6 →0506
2008 → 08
9:05 a.m. →0905
4:18 p.m. →1618

  • If you make a mistake when entering values, press [] or [] to move the cursor to the number to be corrected and overwrite it.
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • You can select one of the following three date formats in <DATE TYPE SELECT>.
  • <MM/DD/YYYY>
  • <DD/MM YYYY>
  • <YYYY MM/DD>


Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

This section describes how to make the fax settings.

If you are using the imageRUNNER1025/1025N, skip the procedure described in this section and got to "Set Up the Network Connection".


Connect Telephone Cables

Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs


Connect Telephone Cables

Return to Overview

  1. Connect the telephone cable to the telephone line jack (A) on the back side of the machine and the other end to the wall jack.

If you want to connect your own external telephone or telephone with built-in answering machine, connect the cable to the external device jack (B) on the back side of the machine.



Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

Return to Overview

This section describes the procedure for registering the user telephone number and unit name. For instructions for entering information, refer to "Information About the Keys" below.


  • Information About the Keys

Use the keys shown below to enter information in the machine.

You can enter the following characters in each input mode:

  • Use - [numeric keys] to enter characters. Press - [numeric keys] repeatedly until the required character appears.
  • Press to enter symbols.
  • Press to switch among input modes:
  • <:a>: Letter mode
  • <:1>: Number mode
  • Press [] or [] to move the cursor position.
  • Press [Clear] to delete the character at the cursor position. Hold [Clear] to delete the entire entry.
  • Press [OK] to cto set the entry and to proceed to the next LCD.

Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • If the display turned off: The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <USER SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <UNIT TELEPHONE #> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter your fax/telehpne number (20 digits maximum including spaces) using - , then press [OK].
  • You can enter the numbers (0-9), space, and + in <UNIT TELEPHONE #>. Press [] to enter the space and press to enter +.
  1. Press [Additional Functions] twice.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <COMMON SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TX SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <UNIT NAME> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the unit name (24 characters maximum) (your name, company name, etc.), then press [OK].
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • About Sender Information

Before sending documents, you MUST register your fax number, unit name, and the current date and time in the machine.

The sender information you register in the machine appears in the header of each page received by your recipient.



Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs

Return to Overview


  • <FaxOnly>

Receives faxes automatically. When you use only the fax function, select this mode without connecting an external telephone.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives faxes automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine does not respond.
  • <FaxTel>

Automatically switches between fax calls and voice calls. The machine receives faxes automatically and it rings for voice calls.

When Receiving FAX: The machine receives fax automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The machine rings.Answer the call.
  • <Ans Mode>

Receives faxes automatically and routes voice calls to the telephone with built-in answering machine.

When Receiving FAX: The telephone with builtin answering machine rings and the machine receives faxes automatically.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The telephone with builtin answering machine rings and records voice messages.
  • <Manual>

Rings for every call, whether it is a fax call or a voice call. For a fax call, you have to manually activate the machine to receive the fax.

When Receiving FAX: The external phone rings. To receive the fax, you can either pick up the receiver and press the [Start] key, or press the [Hook] key followed by the [Start] key. Alternatively, you can use the remote reception function through the external telephone.
When Receiving VOICE CALL: The external telephone rings. Answer the call.

The receive mode determines how the machine responds to incoming faxes and voice calls. Select the mode that most suits your needs from the chart below. For more information about the receive modes, see "About the Receive Modes."


  • Your telephone with built-in answering machine or answering machine must be connected directly to the machine to use <Ans Mode>. Make sure that the auto answering function of the telephone built-in answering or answering machine is activated. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")
  • Make sure that the auto answering function of the telephone built-in answering or answering machine is activated.
  • The external telephone must be connected to the machine to use <FaxTel> or <Manual> to work. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")
  • By default, <FaxOnly> is selected in <RX MODE>. If an external telephone is connected to the machine and receives a fax or voice call, the external telephone rings. You can answer voice calls while the external telephone is ringing.
  • To disable the incoming ring, press [Additional Functions] → <TX/RX SETTINGS> → <FAX SETTINGS> → <RX SETTINGS> → <INCOMING RING>, then select <OFF>.
  • Voice mail is not supported with <Ans Mode>.
  • DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your machine automatically monitors incoming calls and the ring pattern, to let you know if the call is fax or voice call. Set the ring patterns assigned by your telephone company for a fax or voice call. Contact your telephone company for information on availability.

Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • If the display turned off: The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back ON and continue the setup.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <RX MODE>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the receive mode, then press [OK].

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.

  • If Necessary to Use Pulse Dialing

By default, the telephone line type on the machine is set to tone dialing. If you use tone dialing, skip the following procedure. If you use pulse dialing, follow the procedure below and change the telephone line type setting on the machine to the pulse dialing.
If you do not know the type of telephone line you use, contact your local telephone company.


  1. Press [Additional Functions].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <TX/RX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select <FAX SETTINGS>, then press [OK].

  1. Confirm that <USER SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].

  1. Press[] or [] to select <TEL LINE TYPE>, then press [OK].

  1. Press [] or [] to select the telephone line type, then press [OK].

<TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default)

<ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing


  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Set Up the Network Connection

This section describes setting the network connection.

If you are using the imageRUNNER1025 without optional network board installed, skip the procedure described in this section.


Connect the LAN Cable

Set Up the Network Connection

Specify the IP Address Settings

Automatic Setting


Check IP Address Setting


Manual Setting



Connect the LAN Cable

Return to Overview

  1. Connect a LAN cable that is compatible with the LAN connector of this machine.


  • Compatible LAN Cables

A category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable is compatible with the machine. Connect one end to the 10Base-T/100Base-TX port on the back of the machine and the other end to a network router or a hub.

  • The machine does not come with a LAN cable.
  • You can use the imageRUNNER 1025 in a network environment if the optional network board is installed.
  • If you use the machine as a local printer, connect the machine directly to a computer using a USB cable. (See "USB Connection.")


Set Up the Network Connection

Return to Overview

To use the machine connected to a network, you must set up the IP address.
An IP (Internet Protocol) address is an identification number assigned to each individual computer connected to the Internet.
To use the following functions, you must set up the IP address in advance.

Remote UI: Access and change the machine settings from a web browser on the computer by using the Remote UI software.
E-Mail: Send scanned documents attached to e-mail message through a network.
Scan to File Server: Send a scanned document to a file server from the computer.
I-Fax: Send a document to a machine that is compatible with I-fax.
PC Print: Print documents on a computer.
PC Fax: Fax a document on a computer.

The following flow chart indicates the settings needed for each function.



Specify the IP Address Settings

Return to Overview

An IP address must be specified in order to enable communication between the machine and computer.


Remark
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform the following procedures.
  • Before performing the following procedure, make sure that the machine is turned on and connected to a network.

Automatic Setting

Check IP Address Setting

Manual Setting


Automatic Setting

Return to Overview

By default, the IP address is assigned to the machine automatically by the DHCP server. Therefore, all you have to do when using DHCP is just to connect the network cable. After connecting the LAN cable, wait for 30 seconds until the machine obtains the IP address.


Remark
  • This machine also supports automatic IP addresses using BOOTP and RARP protocols. If you use these protocols, follow the procedures on "Manual Setting" and select <ON> in step 6, and then select <ON> in <BOOTP> or <RARP>.


Check IP Address Setting

Return to Overview

To confirm IP address settings, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • If the display turned off: The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <VIEW IP ADDRESS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select <IP ADDRESS>, <SUBNET MASK>, or <GATEWAY ADDRESS>, then press [OK].

If the machine is communicating with the network properly, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are displayed.
If not, they are not displayed.
If the machine does not obtain the IP address 30 seconds after you connect the LAN cable, turn OFF the main power switch, and then turn it ON again and wait for another 90 seconds. If the machine still does not obtain an IP address, ask your network administrator.

  • We recommend you to take note of the IP address you confirmed here. You will need it for "Using the Remote UI."
  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Manual Setting

Return to Overview

This is for the setting for the static IP address. If the machine obtains an IP address automatically in "Automatic Setting," skip this procedure.


Remark
  • The display returns to the standby mode:The machine may enter the standby mode (Auto Clear function) while you are setting it up. Make the setting again from the main menu.
  • If the display turned off: The machine may enter the sleep mode while you are setting it up. Press [Power] to turn the machine back ON and continue the setup.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <NETWORK SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TCP/IP SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IP ADDRESS AUTO.> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <OFF>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <IP ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the IP address using - , then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <SUBNET MASK> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the subnet mask using - , then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <GATEWAY ADDRESS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Enter the gateway address number using - , then press [OK].
  1. Turn the main power switch on the right side of the machine to "" side, wait at least 10 seconds, and then press the main power switch to "" side.
  • Change to the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address settings will be effective after restarting the machine.


Set Up Computers and Software

Connection between a Computer and the Machine

About User Software CD-ROM

Network Connection

USB Connection


Connection between a Computer and the Machine

Return to Overview

There are two ways to connect the machine and computers: USB connection and network connection.



The following functions are available with network connection: PC Print, Remote UI, PC Fax, E-Mail/I-Fax, Scan to File Server.
For more information on how to use each function with network connection, refer to the following:
PC Print → "Printing through Network Connection"
Remote UI → "Using the Remote UI"
PC Fax → "PC Fax"
E-mail/I-Fax → "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax"
Scan to File Server → "Setting Scan to File Server"


  • USB Connection (For details about the set up, see "USB Connection.")


The following functions are available with USB connection: Scan document from a computer, PC Print, PC Fax.
For details on using each function with USB Connection, see the following:
Scan document from a computer → "Scanning Documents to a Computer"
PC Print → "Printing through USB Connection"
PC Fax → "PC Fax"

  • The scanner driver is available only through a USB connection.
  • You can use the USB connection and network connection together.
  • Do not connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable before installing the software.

System Requirements

  • Microsoft Windows 2000
    CPU: Intel Pentium/133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows XP
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 300MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003*
    CPU: Intel Pentium/Celeron series 133MHz or faster
    Memory: 128MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
    CPU: Intel Pentium 800MHz or faster
    Memory: 512MB or more
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008*
    CPU: Minimum: Intel Itanium 2 processor/1 GHz (x86 processor), 1.4GHz (x64 processor) or faster
    Memory: 512MB or more

    *Network only


About User Software CD-ROM

Return to Overview

The User Software CD-ROM consists of the following Drivers and Software.


  • Drivers
  • UFRII LT Driver

Using the UFRII LT Driver, the data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.

  • Fax Driver*

The Fax Driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user selects [Print] from any Windows application software, selects the Canon Fax Driver as the printer, and specifies its destination(s) and options. The Fax Driver then converts this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).

  • PCL Printer Driver**

This is the Hewlett-Packard's PCL printer driver, which includes the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 drivers. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, while the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers are for black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e and offers superior printing quality and speed. This machine supports the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers.

  • Scanner Driver***

Scanner Driver enables computer to use the machine as scanner.

  • iR Toolbox***

iR Toolbox is a program that allows you to easily import images scanned with a scanner into an application, attach them to e-mail messages, save them to the computer, etc.

* Only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.
** The PCL printer driver is optional.
*** Available only through a USB connection.

  • Bundled Programs
  • NetSpot Device Installer (NSDI)

The NetSpot Device Installer enables you to set up the machine for network operations.
When you start this program, click [Additional Software Programs] (See step 3 of "Installation Procedure" in "Network Connection,") then follow the instructions that appear on the screen. For details, see the Readme file and online help for this program.

  • The NetSpot Device Installer is not supported on Windows 64-bit version.

  • Canon Font Manager*

Font Manager is a comprehensive program that helps you manage your fonts in Microsoft Windows.

  • PCL_Barcode*

30 barcode scalable fonts are included.

* Comes with the PCL printer driver. For the installation procedure, refer to the following.

  • To install Canon Font Manager, double-click the CD-ROM icon, then click [Canonfm] → [Setup.exe].
  • To use PCL Barcode, copy the scalable fonts into the [Fonts] directory. The [Fonts] directory is located in the [WINDOWS (WINNT)] folder in the local disk. You can also find the directory on the Control Panel of the Windows.


Network Connection

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • In the following procedures, the imageRUNNER1025iF is used as an example.
  • Before the instalation, make sure the following:
  • Log on as Administrator to install the software.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.


Connect the machine to the network correctly, and confirm that the power is ON.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM to the computer.



Click [Installation] to install the driver software.

  • [Installation]: Installs the driver software.
  • [Additional Software Programs]: Installs bundled software
  • [Display Manuals]: Displays e-Manual and other software manuals

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows Vista: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
Windows 2000: Double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).

Click [Next] under [Connect Printer to Computer via Network].

If you are installing the software on a computer running Windows Server 2003/Server 2008, the screen for this step is not displayed.



Click [Install].

Read License Agreement carefully and click [Yes].



Click [Next].

  • If the Windows firewall is applied to the operating system, the dialog box below may appear. Click [Yes] and continue the installation.

Select your machine on the list, then click [Next].

Make sure that the machine name is highlighted.



Click the drivers you want to install, then click [Next].

Select [Printer] and [Fax], if you use imageRUNNER1025iF.
*Select only [Printer], if you use imageRUNNER 1025 or 1025N.

  • In any of the following conditions, select [Canon Driver Information Assist Service] to install the DIAS service.
    1. If you want to get device information via a print server as a shared network printer
    2. When your computer is connected to a local printer by USB cable or Centronics cable
    3. If you want to get device information in the Auto Create Printer environment, using Terminal Service
  • If you use the optional PCL Printer Kit, the screen below is displayed.
    Confirm that the required drivers are selected and click [next].

Verify the appropriate printer name is displayed and click [Next].

Repeat this step for each driver that you have selected.

  • For the PCL printer users, the screens below are displayed.



  • To share the printer with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008, select [Use as Sheared Printer]. If necessary, you can change the name of shared printer. If you want to set the operating system on which driver will run, click [Driver to add] to install an alternate driver so that a client computer can install the driver via a network.


Click [Next].

Click [Start].



Verify that the printer you want to set as a default printer is selected and click [Next].

If you want to print out a test page, check the printer name and click [Next].

A printer test page is printed out from the machine.
If you do not want to print out a test page, click [Next] leaving the checkbox unchecked.

  • If you select [Fax:Canon iR1024/1025 (FAX)], the [Fax Sending Settings] screen appears. Specify the necessary information such as name, telephone number, etc., then send the test page. If you want to cancel the operation, press [Cancel] on this screen.


Click [Exit].

Click [Next].



Click [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)], then Click [Restart].

Remove the User Software CD-ROM from the computer.

  • If you have several computers that you want to connect multiple computers to the machine through network, repeat the procedure from step 1 for each computer.

  • Check Installation

Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of your machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] folder (Windows 2000: The [Printers] folder).

Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2008: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Printers].


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Right-click the printer icon for this machine → Select [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu.



USB Connection

Return to Overview


Remark
  • The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows XP Professional.
  • Before the instalation, make sure the following:
  • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the software. If you connect the USB cable before installing the software and the Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears, click [Cancel].
  • Log on as Administrator to install the software.
  • Make sure the machine is turned ON before connecting the USB cable.
  • Click on the circled button on each screen to proceed to the next step.
  • The machine does not come with a USB cable.


Insert the User Software CD-ROM to the computer.

Click [Installation] to install the driver software.

  • [Installation]: Installs the driver software.
  • [Additional Software Programs]: Installs bundled software
  • [Display Manuals]: Displays e-Manual and other software manuals

If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer].
Windows Vista: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer].
Windows 2000: Double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon, then double-click [MInst] ([MInst.exe]).



Click [Next] under [Connect Printer Directly to Computer].

Verify the necessary drivers are selected and click [Install].

  • If the disk space is insufficient to install the software, an error message is displayed. Free the disk space, and then try again.


Read License Agreement carefully and click [Yes].

Click [Next] on the iR Drivers - Setup Wizard screen.



Click [Exit].

iR Driver is installed.

Click [Next] on the iR Toolbox - Setup Wizard screen.



Click [Next] to proceed to the next step.

Click [Next].



Click [Start].

Click [Exit].

iR Toolbox is installed.



Click [next].

Click [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)], then Click [Restart].



Attach the ferrite core (A) as close as possible to the B-type side (square) of the USB cable (B). (imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF only)

After restarting your computer, connect the machine and your computer with a USB cable (A).

  • A USB cable is not included.
  • If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears, click [Cancel] and continue the installation.


Remove the User Software CD-ROM from the computer.


  • Check Installation

Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.

  • If the name of your machine is selected on the [Printer] screen from an application, it is set as the default printer.

  1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] folder (Windows 2000: The [Printers] dialog box).

Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start (Start)] → select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Printers].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Printers].
Make sure the corresponding printer driver icon is displayed.


  1. Set your machine as the default printer.

Right-click the printer icon for this machine. Click [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu.


  1. Open the [Scanners and Cameras] folder (Windows 2000: The [Scanners and Cameras Properties] dialog box).

Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras].
Windows Vista: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].
Windows 2000: From the Windows task bar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].
Make sure the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed.


  1. Check if there is the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon on the Windows desktop.

If the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon is displayed on the Windows desktop, installation of the iR Toolbox 4.9 has been successful.



How to Use This Manual

This category describes how to use this manual.



User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) is software that enables you to select and view HTML Manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer screen. Follow the instructions below to use the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual).


System Requirements

Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Symbols Used in This Manual

Illustrations Used in This Manual


System Requirements

Return to Overview

The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) can be used in the following system environments.

  • Target Operating System
Windows: 2000 SP4, XP, Vista (Internet Explorer 6.0 is required if you are using Windows 2000 SP4.)
Mac: OS X 4.x
  • Target Browser
Windows: Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0
Mac: Safari 2.0x
  • Flash Player
Flash Player 8.0 or later

Remark
  • The memory and CPU required to run each operating system are also required.
  • A display resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels or higher is required.
  • The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) may not operate correctly if Flash Player is not installed or a version of Flash Player earlier than Flash Player 8.0 is installed in your computer.


Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual)

Return to Overview

When using the e-Manual with Windows, follow the steps below.

  • Install the e-Manual on your computer.

1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
2. Select the language.
3. Click [Install] button.
4. The installation starts automatically.
5. When the installation finished, press [OK].
6. To display the e-Manual, double-click the short cut icon [imageRUNNER1025_Manual_us] on the desktop.

  • Display the e-Manual directly from the CD-ROM.

1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
2. Select the language.
3. To display the e-Manual, click [Display manual].

When using the e-Manual with Macintosh, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM in your computer.
2. Drag-and-drop the [imageRUNNER1025_Manual_us] folder into the location you want to save it.
3. Open the [imageRUNNER1025_Manual_us] folder.
4. Double click index.html, and the e-Manual is displayed.

  • If you want to create a desktop shortcut, select the check box during installation of the e-Manual.
  • If the Windows CD-ROM autoplay feature is not enabled, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. (Windows Vista: click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer]. Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.) Open the User Manual CD-ROM icon, then double-click start.exe.
  • Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message may be displayed. In this case, allow the contents to be displayed.

When you start the e-Manual, the screen below is displayed.

  • If you are using a browser such as Internet Explorer for Windows XP, ActiveX blocks pop-ups in the background. If the e-Manual is not displayed properly, look for an information bar at the top of the page and click the information bar.

 


A [Top]
Click to return to the top page.
B [Function List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories.
C [Contents]
Click to display the topic pages for Contents.
D [Index]
Click to display the topic pages for Index.
E [Glossary]
Click to display the glossary in a separate window.
F [Search]
Click to display a list of the topic page titles that include the phrase you enter. Click a title to display the corresponding topic page.
G [Print]
Click to print all categories or a single category.
H Function Categories
Select a function category to display a list of image icons for the topics corresponding to that function. Click an image icon or [Display Function List] to display the topic pages for the function category.
I Appendix Categories
Select an appendix category to display the topic pages not related to functions, such as the maintenance and troubleshooting topics.
J [Office Locations]
Click to display Canon contact details in a separate window.

Remark
  • When performing a search, make sure to enter a phrase that will match a keyword. Depending on the phrase you enter, the correct search results may not be displayed.
  • Topic pages can be printed by page or by category.
  • The background color and images of the Topic Page may not be printed, depending on the web browser settings.


Symbols Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

  • Indicates a warning or a caution concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use this machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings and cautions.
  • Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.
  • Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
  • The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.
  • Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + [Key name]
    Example: [Stop].
  • Information in the display appears in angle brackets: <STOP KEY PRESSED>.


Illustrations Used in This Manual

Return to Overview

Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this manual are those taken when no optional equipment is attached to the imageRUNNER 1025iF.

If there is any difference between the imageRUNNER 1025, 1025N or 1025iF, it is clearly indicated in the text, for instance "imageRUNNER 1025iF Only."




Troubleshooting

This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams, as well as to error messages.



Error Codes (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

An error code is a four-digit code shown on an ERROR TX REPORT or an ERROR RX REPORT when an error occurs.

For details on reports, see "Summary of Reports and Lists."

See the table below for individual error codes.


#0001

#0003

#0005

#0009

#0012

#0018

#0037

#0703

#0705

#0751

#0752

#0753

#0755

#0801

#0802

#0804

#0806

#0808

#0810

#0812

#0813

#0819

#0820

#0821

#0827

#0828

#0829

#0995

#0001

Description

A document may be jammed.

Action

Remove the jammed document. (See "Clearing Jams.")

#0003

Description1

An attempt was made to send a document of 24 7/8" (630 mm) or longer from the ADF.

Action

Divide the document into smaller parts and send from the platen glass.

Description2

A document takes a long time to send because it contains too much data.

Action

Reduce the scanning resolution before sending.

Description3

A document takes a long time to receive.

Action

Contact the other party and ask them to reduce their scanning resolution or divide the document into smaller parts for sending.

#0005

Description1

The other fax machine did not respond within 35 seconds.

Action

Send the document again. Contact the other party and have them check their fax machine. If you are making an overseas call, add a pause to the number.

Description2

The other party may not be using a G3 fax machine.

Action

Check with the other party and send the document to a G3 fax machine. If the other party does not have a G3 fax machine, try sending your document using a transmission mode the other party's fax machine supports.

#0009

Description

The paper has run out or the paper drawer is not set properly.

Action

Load the paper or reset the paper drawer properly.

#0012

Description

You could not send because the recipient's machine is out of paper.

Action

Contact the recipient and ask them to load the paper.

#0018

Description

There is no reply when you redial. You could not send, because your fax signal was not returned as the recipient's line was engaged.

Action

Check that the recipient's line is not engaged and try again from the beginning.

#0037

Description

The memory is full.

Action

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

#0703

Description

The memory for image data is full when sending color documents.

Action1

Wait a few moments, and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete.

Action2

Erase documents stored in memory. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

#0705

Description

The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than that specified in <MAX TX DATA SIZE> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Action1

Change the setting for <MAX TX DATA SIZE> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Action2

Select a lower resolution.

Action3

If you are using I-fax, decrease the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the Maximum TX Data Size.

Action4

Set <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> to <ON> in send settings.

#0751

Description

The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).

Action1

Check the recipient's address.

Action2

Check that the network is up.

#0752

Description1

The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct, or the server is not functioning.

Action1

Check the SMTP Server name, domain name, and E-mail Address in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.

Action2

Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.

Description3

The network is down.

Action3

Check the network status.

#0753

Description

A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Action

Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON.

#0755

Description1

You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

Action

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The IP address is not set.

Action

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description3

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.

Action

Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Or wait a while, and then try sending again.

#0801

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an email message or send/receive an I-fax.

Action1

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally, or check the network status.

Description2

The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.

Action2

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.

#0802

Description1

The name of the SMTP Server in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is incorrect.

Action1

Check the name of the SMTP Server in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description2

The DNS server name in <DNS SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is incorrect.

Action2

Check the DNS server name in <DNS SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

Description3

Connection to the DNS server failed.

Action3

Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

#0804

Description

You have no permission to access the folder.

Action

Change the setting on the server to enable access to the folder.

#0806

Description1

An incorrect user name or password has been stored in the address book as a file server address.

Action

Change the user name or password.

Description2

An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.

Action

Check the e-mail or I-fax address.

#0808

Description1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server.

Action1

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Action2

Check the network status.

Description2

The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission.

Action1

Check that the FTP server is functioning normally.

Action2

Check the network status.

Action3

Check the destination setting.

Action4

Check the status and setting of the file server.

#0810

Description1

A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Description2

The POP server returned an error during the connection.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Description3

A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

#0812

Description

The POP password setting is incorrect.

Action

Check the POP Server password in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

#0813

Description

The POP Server name setting is incorrect.

Action

Check the POP Server name in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.

#0819

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

#0820

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

#0821

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

#0827

Description

You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).

Action

Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.

#0828

Description

You have received HTML data.

Action

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.

#0829

Description

Data containing more pages that the machine can hold in the memory is received.

Action

Print the received documents, and ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

#0995

Description

Communication reservation is cleared.

Action

If necessary, try again from the beginning.



If a Power Failure Occurs

If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes.

During a power outage, functions are limited as follows:

  • You cannot send, receive, copy, or print documents.
  • You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of telephone you use.
  • You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use.


Service Call Message

If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, one of the following service call messages may appear on the display. If this occur, write down the service call message displayed, turn OFF the main power switch, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.


  • E000
  • E100
  • E716
  • E001
  • E196
  • E719
  • E002
  • E197
  • E730
  • E003
  • E246
  • E733
  • E007
  • E247
  • E736
  • E010
  • E350
  • E739
  • E019
  • E354
  • E805
  • E052
  • E355
  • E808

Follow the procedure below to solve the problem.


Remark
  • Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
  • Always grasp the power plug portion when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the cord portion may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.
  • Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
  • If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
  • Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.
  1. Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch back ON.
  1. If the machine still does not operate normally, follow the procedure below, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

– Turn OFF the main power.

– Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

  • When contacting your local authorized Canon dealer, check the following:
  • Model name
  • Problem and status of the machine
  • Error code on the display


Clearing Jams

When a jam occurs in the machine, the paper jam message appears on the display. Check the jam location indicator where the jam occurs, then remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper.
  • When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • Do not force a jammed original or paper out of the machine. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer for assistance if needed.

Originals Jams

Paper Jams

Stack Bypass


Inside the Machine and Paper Drawers



Originals Jams

Return to Overview



When <CHECK DOCUMENT> or <DOCUMENT TOO LONG> appears on the display, remove a jammed original from the ADF.

  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Remove any jammed originals.
  • If the jammed original cannot be removed easily, do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to the next step.
  1. Lift the original feeder tray.
  1. Remove any jammed originals.
  1. Lower the original feeder tray and close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Open the ADF cover, and remove any jammed originals.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


Paper Jams

Return to Overview

When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from inside the machine first, then from the paper drawer if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Even the edge of the paper stack by a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
  • Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See "Print Media.")
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Stack Bypass

Inside the Machine and Paper Drawers


Stack Bypass

Return to Overview

When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass.

  1. Remove all paper from the stack bypass.
  1. Remove any jammed paper.


Inside the Machine and Paper Drawers

Return to Overview

When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from inside the machine first, then from the paper drawer if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:

  • Even the edge of the paper stack by a flat surface before loading it in the machine.
  • Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from inside the machine.
  1. Open the left cover.
  1. Carefully pull the jammed paper out of the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly (A) as it becomes very hot during use.
  • If you tear the paper, remove any scraps of paper to avoid further jams.
  • If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
  1. Tilt the 2-sided transport guide (A) toward the machine, then remove the jammed paper (Only for 2-sided copying).
  1. Lift and hold the transcription frame (B), then remove the jammed paper (Only for 2-sided copying).
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. If you use the optional paper drawer, open the cover on the left side of the optional paper drawer. Remove any jammed paper, then close the cover.
  1. Pull out the paper drawer and push the corners of the stack under the tabs.
  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


If <CHANGE PAPERSIZE> is Displayed

When <CHANGE PAPERSIZE> appears on the display, the size of the paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass is different from that of the paper specified in <DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2>* of <REG. PAPER SIZE>, or <PAPER SIZE> of <BYPASS STD SET>. You need to load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2>* of <REG. PAPER SIZE>, or <PAPER SIZE> of <BYPASS STD SET> in <COMMON SETTINGS>.

* Only when the optional Cassette Feeding Module-N2 is attached.


Remark
  • For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.

Reloading the Paper

Changing the Paper Size Setting

For the Paper Drawer

For the Stack Bypass


Reloading the Paper

Return to Overview

  1. Load the correct size paper as shown on the display.

The machine restarts printing.



Changing the Paper Size Setting

For the Paper Drawer

For the Stack Bypass


For the Paper Drawer

Return to Overview

Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REG. PAPER SIZE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DRAWER 1> or <DRAWER 2>*, then press [OK].

* Only when the optional Cassette Feeding Module-N2 is attached.

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <LGL>, <OFICIO>, <FLSP>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <A4>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


For the Stack Bypass

Return to Overview

If you set the standard settings for stack bypass, follow the procedures below to change paper size.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Confirm that <COMMON SETTINGS> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BYPASS STD SET>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <PAPER SIZE> is displayed, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes:

<LTR>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>, <FREESIZE>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <LGL>

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Error Messages

Error Messages <A to E>

Error Messages <F to J>

Error Messages <K to O>

Error Messages <P to Z >


Error Messages <A to E>

Return to Overview


ADJUSTING WAITING TO SCAN

AUTO REDIAL

CHANGE PAPERSIZE

CHANGE REG'D SIZE → COMMON SETTINGS

CHECK DOCUMENT

CLOSE COVER FRONT OR LEFT COVER

DATA ERROR

DOCUMENT TOO LONG

DRUM IS NOT SET INSERT THE DRUM

ADJUSTING WAITING TO SCAN

Description

The machine is not ready for scanning.

Action

Wait until the machine is ready.

AUTO REDIAL

Description

This message appears when the recipient is engaged in direct sending and the job is waiting.

Action

Disappears when the transmission restarts.

CHANGE PAPERSIZE

Description

The size of the paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass is different from that of the paper specified in <REG. PAPER SIZE> or <BYPASS STD SET> in the <COMMON SETTINGS> menu.

Action1

Load the paper of the size shown on the display.

Action2

If you are trying to print a report or list, set the paper size to <LTR> or <LGL>, then load paper of the same size.

CHANGE REG'D SIZE → COMMON SETTINGS

Description1

The size of the paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass is different from that of the paper specified in <REG. PAPER SIZE> or <BYPASS STD SET> in the <COMMON SETTINGS> menu.

Action1

Change the paper size setting.

Description2

The paper ran out during the print job.

Action2

Load paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass.

CHECK DOCUMENT

Description

A document jam may have occurred in the ADF.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

CLOSE COVER FRONT OR LEFT COVER

Description

A cover is open.

Action

Close the cover shown on the lower line of the display.

DATA ERROR

Description

The machine may have trouble.

Action

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

DOCUMENT TOO LONG

Description

The document fed from the ADF is longer than 24 7/8" (630 mm), or is not feeding correctly.

Action1

Scan the document on the platen glass.

Action2

Reduce the length of the document to within 24 7/8" (630 mm), then try again.

DRUM IS NOT SET INSERT THE DRUM

Description

A drum unit is not installed or not installed correctly.

Action

Install the drum unit correctly.



Error Messages <F to J>

Return to Overview


FEEDER PAPER JAM CHECK THE FEEDER

INITIALIZING...

FEEDER PAPER JAM CHECK THE FEEDER

Description

A document jam may have occurred in the ADF.

Action

Remove the jammed document.

INITIALIZING...

Description

This message appears when turning on the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing.

Action

Wait until the message disappears.



Error Messages <K to O>

Return to Overview


LOAD PAPER

MEM IN USE nn%

MEMORY FULL

NO APPROPRIATE SIZE

NOT AVAILABLE NOW

NOT REGISTERED

OUT OF TONER CHANGE TONER

OUTPUT TRAY FULL

LOAD PAPER

Description

No paper is loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass, or not inserted correctly.

Action

Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go or load paper.

MEM IN USE nn%

Description

This message shows the percentage of the memory currently in use. This message is displayed when you set the document in the ADF to send a fax.

Action

If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

MEMORY FULL

Description1

The machine is full of jobs.

Action1

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Action2

Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one.

Action3

Send the document with low resolution.

Action4

When this message appears during using the ADF, the scanning document stops halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam from the ADF.

Description2

The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum.

Action2

The maximum numbers of jobs that can be stored in memory are as follows (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the imageRUNNER 1025iF with ITU-T No.1 Chart standard mode);
Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, or 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving jobs.
Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

NO APPROPRIATE SIZE

Description

Although <PAPER SELECT> is set to <AUTO> in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in the <COPY SETTINGS> menu, appropriate size paper is not set in the paper drawer or stack bypass.

Action

Select the paper size, or set the copy ratio.

NOT AVAILABLE NOW

Description1

You pressed the one-touch key or coded dial code that has already been registered, when you are registering favorites buttons, one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or group addresses.

Action1

Register the one-touch key or coded dial code that is not used.

Description2

You have specified the group dialing when the line is off the hook.

Action2

Specify the recipient other than group dialing.

NOT REGISTERED

Description

No destination is registered for the one-touch key or coded dial code you pressed.

Action

Register the destinations before using the Address Book function.

OUT OF TONER CHANGE TONER

Description1

A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.

Action1

Install the toner cartridge correctly.

Description2

The toner ran out completely.

Action2

Replace the toner cartridge.

OUTPUT TRAY FULL

Description

The paper delivery tray is full of paper.

Action

Remove the printouts from the paper delivery tray.



Error Messages <P to Z>

Return to Overview


PAPER JAM

PLATEN GLASS DIRTY CLEAN PLATEN GLASS

RECEIVED IN MEMORY

START AGAIN

STOP KEY PRESSED PRESS OK KEY

SYSTEM ERROR

TONER LOW PREPARE NEW TONER

TRANSMITTING...

WASTE TONER FULL REPLACE THE DRUM

PAPER JAM

Description

Paper jams have occurred in the machine.

Action

Remove the jammed paper. The cover must be opened and closed to resume the current job.

PLATEN GLASS DIRTY CLEAN PLATEN GLASS

Description

The ADF scanning area on the left side of the platen glass may be dirty.

Action

Clean the ADF scanning area, then press [OK].

RECEIVED IN MEMORY

Description

The machine received the fax/I-fax in memory because paper or toner ran out, paper jams occurred, or incorrect size paper was loaded.

Action

Load the correct size paper in the paper drawer, replace the toner cartridge, or clear the paper jams. For more information, see the following:
"Setting Paper Type and Size,"
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge,"
"Clearing Jams"

START AGAIN

Description1

A transmission error occurred because the line condition was poor.

Action1

Check the line condition, then try again.

Description2

The paper jammed or ran out during printing a report.

Action2

Clear the paper jam, or replenish the paper, then try again.

STOP KEY PRESSED PRESS OK KEY

Description

[Stop] has been pressed while scanning the document using the ADF.

Action

Press [OK], then set the document again.

SYSTEM ERROR

Description

Some kind of error has occurred in the machine.

Action

Turn off the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it on again. If the message persists, unplug the machine from the power supply and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

TONER LOW PREPARE NEW TONER

Description

The toner is running low.

Action

Prepare a new toner cartridge.

TRANSMITTING...

Description

During the current transmission, the machine may have tried to send a document identified from the list of documents in memory.

Action

Wait until the transmission from memory is complete.

WASTE TONER FULL REPLACE THE DRUM

Description

The drum unit is filled with waste toner.

Action

Replace the drum unit. (See "Replacing the Drum Unit.")



Troubleshooting

General Problems

Paper Feeding Problems

Sending/Receiving Problems

Sending Problems


Receiving Problems


Copying Problems

Printing Problems

Scanning Problems

Telephone Problems

Network Problems

Installing and Uninstalling Problems


General Problems

Return to Overview


The machine has no power.

The Error indicator comes on.

Nothing appears in the display.

The machine has no power.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on.

Is the power cord supplying power?

Use a different power cord, or test the cord for continuity using a voltmeter.

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch.

The Error indicator comes on.

Does the machine feed paper correctly, or is there paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass?

Clear the paper jam, or load paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass. (For instructions on clearing paper jams, See "Clearing Jams." For instructions on loading paper, see "Loading Paper.")

If the machine has no paper jam, or paper is loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass, turn off the machine and wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it on again. If the problem is fixed, the Alarm indicator will turn off, and the display will return to the standby mode. If the Alarm indicator remains flash, unplug the machine, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Nothing appears in the display.

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Unplug the machine and wait for 5 seconds, then plug it back in. If the display still remains blank, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch.

Is the machine in Sleep mode?

Press [Power] on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode.



Paper Feeding Problems

Return to Overview


Paper does not feed properly.

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Paper does not feed properly.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Multiple sheets feed together into the machine.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Does the machine contain too many sheets?

Make sure you load the correct quantity. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are different types of paper loaded in the machine?

Load only one type of paper.

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Let the paper run out before refilling the machine. Avoid mixing new stock with the paper already loaded.

Repeated paper jams occur.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")



Sending/Receiving Problems

Sending Problems

Receiving Problems


Sending Problems

Return to Overview


Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

Cannot send a fax.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

The documents you sent are too light.

Sending of documents is too slow.

Cannot send using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Document cannot be sent to an e-mail address, I-fax address or file server.

If you are sending an e-mail message or I-fax, are the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings correct?

Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.

If you are sending to a file server, are the user and password settings correct?

Check the user and password settings, and send the document again.

If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?

Check the shared folder settings. (See "Setting Shared Folder.")

Cannot send a fax.

Is the machine overheated?

Unplug the machine and let it cool for about 5 minutes. Then plug in the machine and try sending again.

Did you just turn on the machine?

Wait until the machine is ready.

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

Is your machine in the fax mode?

Press [SEND], confirm that <FAX> is displayed, then press [OK] to show the fax standby display.

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "Originals Handling.")

Make sure the left and front covers are fully closed.

Is the one-touch key or coded dial code you entered registered correctly?

Check that the Address Book settings are registered correctly. (See "Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys," and "Storing Editing Coded Dial Codes.")

Did you dial the correct number?

Check that you have the correct number.

Is the machine in the Sleep mode?

The machine does not scan documents if it is in the Sleep mode. To take the machine out of the Sleep mode, press [Power] on the operation panel.

Is the recipient's machine out of paper?

Ask the recipient to make sure paper is loaded in the machine.

Are there other documents being sent from memory?

Allow time for the documents to finish sending.

Has an error occurred during transmission?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect the Power Cord and Turn On the Machine.")

Is the telephone line working properly?

Make sure there is a dial tone when you press [Hook] or when you lift the handset of any external telephone connected to the machine. If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company.

Is the recipient's machine a G3 fax machine?

Make sure the recipient's machine is compatible with your machine.

Is BUSY/NO SIGNAL shown on the ERROR TX REPORT?

The fax number you dialed is busy. Try sending the document later.

The recipient's machine is not working. Ask the recipient to check the machine.

Did the recipient's machine answer within 35 seconds (after all automatic redialing attempts)?

Ask the recipient to check the machine. For an overseas call, add pauses to the registered number. (See "Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses).")

Is the Processing/Data indicator lit?

The external phone is busy. Please wait until the external phone becomes free.

Memory fills up immediately when you try to send.

Are you sending with the resolution set to <SUPER FINE> or <ULTRA FINE>?

If your document does not contain fine text or photographs, set the resolution to <STANDARD>.

If your document contains fine text or photographs, send it directly rather than using a memory transmission.

Is a document stored in memory, leaving little memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Faxes sent from the machine are spotted or dirty.

Is the recipient's machine working properly?

Check the machine by making a copy. If the copy is clear, the problem may be in the recipient's machine. If the copy is spotted or dirty, clean the scanner components. (See "Scanning Area.")

Is the document loaded correctly?

Make sure the document is correctly loaded. (See "In the ADF.")

The documents you sent are too light.

Is the density set to the <–LT> side?

Set the density to the <DK+> side.

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

Make sure the scanning components are clean.

Sending of documents is too slow.

Is the resolution set to <FINE>, <SUPER FINE>, or <ULTRA FINE>?

Setting the resolution to <STANDARD> reduces the sending time.

Is Error Correction Mode (ECM) set to <ON>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set ECM to <OFF>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")

Cannot send using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the recipient's machine support ECM?

If the recipient's machine does not support ECM, the document is sent in normal mode without error checking.

Errors occur frequently while sending.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal transmission (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the transmission speed. (See "Machine Settings.")



Receiving Problems

Return to Overview


The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, I-fax, or file server).

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Print quality is poor.

Faxes do not print.

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Cannot get documents from information services.

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

The machine does not receive documents (e-mail, I-fax, or file server).

Are network settings specified?

Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not specified. Confirm this with your System Manager.

Cannot receive a fax automatically.

Is the machine set to receive automatically?

For the machine to receive faxes automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxTel>, <FaxOnly>, or <AnsMode>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Loading Paper.")

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

No automatic switching between telephone and fax calls.

Is the machine set to switch automatically between telephone and fax calls?

For the machine to switch between fax and telephone calls automatically, the receive mode must be set to <FaxTel>, <AnsMode>, or <DRPD>. If you have set <AnsMode>, confirm that an answering machine is connected to the machine and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded. (See "Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs.")

Are documents stored in memory, leaving little or no memory available?

Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.

Has an error occurred during reception?

Check the display for an error message. (See "Error Messages.")

Print an Activity Report and check for an error. (See "Activity Report.")

Is paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded. (See "Set Up the Paper Drawer and Load Paper.")

Can the sender's machine send the CNG signal, which tells your machine that the incoming call is a fax call?

Some machines cannot send this signal. In such cases, receive the fax manually.

Cannot receive a document manually.

Is the machine set to receive manually?

For the machine to receive faxes manually, the receive mode must be set to <Manual>. (See "Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs.")

If you set <MANUAL/AUTO> to <ON> in <RX SETTINGS> located in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, the machine will receive faxes automatically even when the receive mode is set to <Manual>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")

Have you disconnected the call by pressing [Start] or dialing the remote reception ID after hanging up?

Always press (Start) or dial the remote reception ID before hanging up. Otherwise you will disconnect the call.

Print quality is poor.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Is the machine in the toner saver mode?

Set <TONER SAVER MODE> to <OFF> in <COMMON SETTINGS>. (See "COMMON SETTINGS.")

Faxes do not print.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridges?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridges. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Is the correct size of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Change <REG. PAPER SIZE> in <COMMON SETTINGS>. (See "Setting Paper Size and Type.")

Received faxes print blotched or unevenly.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Error Correction Mode (ECM) should eliminate such problems. However, if the telephone lines are in poor condition, you may have to try again.

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the scanning components of the machine are clean.

Is the toner low?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Does the sender's machine support ECM?

If the sender's machine does not support ECM, the document is received in normal mode without error checking.

Receiving of documents is too slow.

Is ECM (Error Correction Mode) set to <ON>?

Because ECM corrects errors during a transmission, any problems on the line can mean that the transmission will take extra time. Set ECM to <OFF>. (See "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")

Cannot get documents from information services.

Is your machine set to the tone dialing type of the telephone line?

Press (Tone) to set the tone dialing.

Were there any instructions from the sender, such as to set to receive?

Just before receiving, press [Start].

Errors occur frequently while receiving.

Are the telephone lines in poor condition, or do you have a bad connection?

Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal reception (e.g., microwave oven).

Lower the reception speed. (See "SYSTEM SETTINGS.")

Is the sender's machine functioning properly?

Ask the sender to check that the machine is functioning properly.



Copying Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot make copies.

Cannot make copies.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridge. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the toner cartridge installed properly?

Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Make sure the front cover is fully closed.

Is the original loaded correctly?

Make sure the original is correctly loaded. (See "Originals Handling.")

Does the document meet the requirements for the machine?

Make sure you load originals that meet the requirements for use.(See "Originals Handling.")



Printing Problems

Return to Overview


Nothing prints.

Printout is skewed.

Paper jams occur.

Printout is not clear.

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Nothing prints.

Have you removed the plastic seal from the toner cartridge?

Make sure you remove the seal from the cartridges. (See "Install Toner Cartridge.")

Is the cartridge out of toner?

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")

Printout is skewed.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Make sure the paper is correctly loaded in the machine. (See "Loading Paper.")

Make sure the paper delivery slot is free of obstructions.

Paper jams occur.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Printout is not clear.

Is the correct type of paper loaded in the machine?

Make sure you load paper that meets the requirements for use. (See "Paper Requirements.")

Are you printing on the wrong side of the paper?

Some types of paper have a "correct" side for printing. If the printout quality is not as clear as you think it should be, try printing on the other side of the paper.

Printout has vertical white streaks.

Is toner low?

Replace the cartridge. (See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge.")



Scanning Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot scan a document.

You tried to create a multipage PDF, but were not able to scan several documents.

Computer has hung up or frozen.

You installed the applications in the CD-ROM supplied with the machine but they are not registered in the iR Toolbox.

When you click a button on the iR Toolbox, another application opens.

Changed settings in a dialog box are not activated.

Scanned images look dirty.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Cannot scan highlighted marks.

Cannot scan a document.

Is there anything shown on the display?

If nothing is shown on the display, see "Nothing appears on the display."

Is the Error indicator blinking?

If the Error indicator is blinking, see "The Error indicator comes on."

Is the original placed correctly?

Remove the original and place it on the platen glass or in the ADF correctly. (See "Originals Handling.")

Is your computer working properly?

Restart your computer.

Is a USB hub or repeater working properly?

When using a USB hub or repeater, try connecting a USB cable directly to the computer to check if it works properly. If you can scan the document successfully after connecting a USB cable directly to the computer, check your USB hub or repeater if it is working properly.

Are you using a USB 2.0-compatible USB hub?

If you connect the machine to a USB 2.0-equipped computer using a USB 2.0-compatible USB hub, you may not be able to scan. In this case, connect a USB cable directly to the computer.

If you connect the machine to a USB 2.0-equipped computer, you may not be able to scan. If your PC is equipped with two or more USB ports, try connecting the machine to another USB ports. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below to modify the INI file. It is recommended to make a backup copy of the file before making any changes to it.
1. Open the following file in Notepad or another text editor application.
Windows 2000: winnt\system32\CNCMFP22.ini
Windows XP/Vista: windows\system32\CNCMFP22.ini
2. In the [ScanSize] section, change "Read512Bytes=0" to "Read512Bytes=1," then save the file. Take care not to modify any other parts.

Have you specified the document source correctly with the iR Toolbox, ScanGear iR, or WIA driver?

Choose between placing the document on the platen glass or in the ADF.

After installing the software, did you install a TWAIN-compatible application?

The TWAIN system file is replaced with something inappropriate and you will be unable to scan images. If this happens, remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Uninstalling Software" and "Set Up Computers and Software." )

Is the machine recognized in [Scanners and Cameras] of the [Control Panel] folder?

Make sure the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed in [Scanners and Cameras] of the [Control Panel] folder.
1. Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Scanners and Cameras].
(Windows Vista: Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scanners and Cameras].
Windows 2000: Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras].)
2. If the corresponding scanner driver icon is displayed in the [Scanners and Cameras], the machine is recognized. If not, remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Uninstalling Software" and "Set Up Computers and Software.")

You tried to create a multipage PDF, but were not able to scan several documents.

Is the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] check box in [Preferences] selected?

If you scan with the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] setting selected, only the documents placed at one time on the platen glass will be scanned.
Click a button on the iR Toolbox and, in the settings dialog box, select [Display the Scanner Driver] to open the ScanGear iR. In the [Preferences] dialog box of Advanced Mode, clear the [Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning] check box before scanning.

Computer has hung up or frozen.

Is enough memory loaded in your computer?

Quit other opened applications and try again.

Is enough space available in the hard disk?

Check that the hard disk has enough available space, in particular when scanning large documents at a high resolution. For example, a LTR-size document scanned at 600 dpi, full color requires a minimum of 300 MB of disk space.

Does an error occur when scanning an image in Photoshop?

Change the allocated memory. From the [Edit] menu, select [Preferences] → click [Memory & Image Cache]. Change the [Memory Usage] in a range of approximately 50% to 60%.

Is the driver installed properly?

Remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Uninstalling Software" and "Set Up Computers and Software".)

You installed the applications in the CD-ROM supplied with the machine but they are not registered in the iR Toolbox.

Have you installed the applications with the iR Toolbox open?

If you install the applications with the iR Toolbox open, the applications will not be registered in the iR Toolbox. On the iR Toolbox dialog box, click [Set] to register the application manually. (See "External Program (Mail Program).")

When you click a button on the iR Toolbox, another application opens.

Is the application selected correctly for that button?

Click button on the iR Toolbox and select the application you want to open for that button. (See "External Program (Mail Program).")

Changed settings in dialog box are not activated.

Did you restart your computer after changing the settings?

If you open [Scanners and Cameras] in the [Control Panel] folder and change the settings in the [Events] tab, the changes may not be reflected. In this case, restart your computer.

Scanned images look dirty.

Are the scanning components of the machine clean?

Clean the platen glass, the platen glass cover and the ADF scanning area.

Is the image size too small?

Some applications do not display an image properly at small sizes. Try displaying the image at 100% magnification.

Does the monitor display color set at below 16 bits?

In [Display Properties], set the display colors to 16-bit color, 24-bit color or higher.

Scanned image is displayed at a larger (smaller) size on the computer screen.

Is the resolution setting correct?

Do one of the following:

  • Enlarge or reduce the image display in the application. If you open the image in Paint or Imaging, it may display at a large size and you will not be able to reduce it.
  • Change the resolution and scan again. The image will be large if the resolution is high. It will be small if the resolution is low. (See "Determining Resolution.")

Cannot scan highlighted marks.

Is [Color Correction] set to [Color Matching] ?

In [Advanced Mode] in ScanGear iR, set [Color Correction] to [Color Matching]. (See "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR.")



Telephone Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot dial.

Telephone disconnects while talking.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Cannot dial.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the power cord plugged in securely?

Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet. If the machine is plugged into a power strip, make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on. (See "Connect the Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine.")

Is the main power switch turned on?

Turn on the main power switch. (See "Connect the Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine.")

Is the machine set for the correct telephone line type?

Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type. (See "Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax).")

Telephone disconnects while talking.

Is the telephone cable connected properly?

Make sure the cable is connected properly. (See "Connect Telephone Cables.")

Is the telephone cable defective?

Use another cord.

Calls do not connect, or the wrong number is dialed.

Did you check for the dial tone before entering the telephone number?

Make sure to check for the dial tone before entering a telephone number. If you enter the number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not connect or the wrong number may be dialed.



Network Problems

Return to Overview


Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Unable to send data/share files (FTP).

Unable to send data/share files (Windows and Samba File Sharing).

Unable to print from a TCP/IP network.

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Set up Network Connection.")

Is the TCP/IP network properly set up?

Make sure the IP addresses are properly set up. If the IP addresses are set using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, make sure they are operating. (See "Setting and Checking the IP Address.")

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or Print Manager.

Is the name of the file being printed too long?

Rename the file with a shorter name. Normally LPR (or the Microsoft TCP/IP Printer, if you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Sever 2008) sends jobs either under the name of the application software used for printing or the file name. However, a job name longer than 255 bytes cannot be sent to the machine.

The printer port name is not displayed in [Print to the following port(s)].

Are the machine and cable properly connected?

Check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, then restart the machine. (See "Set up Network Connection")

Is the computer that is printing properly set up?

Make sure the proper printer driver is installed. (See "Set Up Computers and Software.")

Make sure the correct machine is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing in [Printers and Faxes] or [Printers].

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to the network).

Does the dial-up router send packets via broadcast?

If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If the dial-up router has to send packets via broadcast, check that the settings are correct.

Does the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine exist on the network?

Check that the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine is correct.

Does the DNS server exist on an external network?

If you attempt to access a device on the network to which the machine is connected, with the DNS server on an external network, set the destination using an IP address, not a host name.

Is the device's information set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected correct?

If information about a device on an external network is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected, check the settings.

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Are the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE> correct?

If the settings for [IP Address Range Settings] do not permit the IP address of a computer on which the Remote UI or utility is used, you cannot set the machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <SET IP ADD RANGE>. (See "Registering a Range of IP Addresses to Prohibit.")

Is <USE SNMP> or <DEDICATED PORT> is set to <OFF>?

Set <USE SNMP> and <DEDICATED PORT> to <ON>. (See "Setting SNMP.")

Does the SNMP community name match?

If you use an SNMP community name different from the one stored in the machine to access the machine from a utility, the utility will not detect the machine. In this case, check the SNMP community name. (See "Setting SNMP.")

Unable to send data/share files (FTP).

Is the FTP server set correctly?

Perform the following to check the server status. (For Windows, perform these from the MS-DOS prompt.)

  • Example using UNIX, where the FTP server has the IP address:

192.168.1.195
U:>ftp 192.168.1.195 *Connect to server Connected to 192.168.1.195.
220 canmfs FTP server (UNIX(r) System V Release 4.0) ready.
User (192.168.1.195:(none)): user_name *User login
331 Password required for user_name.
Password: *Enter password 230 User user_name logged in.
ftp> cd /export/share *Move to data destination directory
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> bin *Set data transfer type (binary)
200 Type set to I.
ftp> put sample.tif *Set transfer file name for verification
ftp> bye *Cut off server connection
221 Goodbye
If the above are confirmed and file sharing still does not operate normally, consult the network administrator for the environment you are using.

Does the machine's address <LOGIN NAME> setting contains one or more spaces after the user name?

Ensure that the machine's address <LOGIN NAME> setting does not contain spaces after the user name.

Was the machine turned OFF while sending data to the FTP server? And when the machine was turned back ON, did it attempt to resend the data? (If a Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 FTP server is being used.)

If power to the machine is turned OFF while data is being sent to the FTP server, the FTP server may hold the data in a writing-in-progress state. Therefore, this data cannot be overwritten even when the machine reconnects and sends the same data again. Stop the FTP server temporarily and delete the held data, so it can be sent again.

Is an error message or code displayed on the display of the machine?

After confirming the error message, see "Error Messages," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to send data/share files (Windows and Samba File Sharing).

Are File sharing settings for the shared folder correct?

Check the following settings:

  • On the computer you are using, go into Windows Explorer → double-click [Entire Network] → check that the computer you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the computer as follows: On the [Start] menu, point to [Find] → [Computer] → enter the name of the computer you want to share → check that the computer is on the network.
  • If the computer you want to share is listed, double-click its icon to see whether the shared name of the folder you want to share is listed.
  • If the name of the shared folder does not appear, see "Setting Shared Folder" and check the shared folder settings.

Is an error message or code shown on the display of the machine?

After confirming the error message, see "Error Messages" and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.



Installing and Uninstalling Problems

Return to Overview


Cannot install the software.

Removal of the drivers takes too long (Windows XP).

Removal of the software was completed, but [Canon] folder remains in the [Start Menu].

Cannot use the software after upgrading to Windows XP.

Cannot install the software.

Have you followed the instructions to install the software?

Try reinstalling the software. If an error occurred and installation was not complete, restart your computer and try reinstalling the software.

Are any other applications open?

Quit all of these and try reinstalling the software.

Removal of the drivers takes too long (Windows XP).

Is any application such as an anti-virus open when removing the software?

Quit any applications (including anti-virus) before removing the software.

Removal of the software was completed, but [Canon] folder remains in the [Start Menu].

Did you remove the iR drivers before removing the iR Toolbox?

If you remove the iR drivers first, the [Canon] folder may remain even after the iR Toolbox is uninstalled. In this case, perform the following steps to remove the folder.
In Windows Visnta, right-click the [start] menu → select [Open All Users] or [Explore All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.
In Windows XP, right-click the [start] menu to open the Windows Explorer → select [Start Menu] in [All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.
In Windows 2000, open [Settings] from the [Start] menu → click [Taskbar & Start Menu] → [Advanced] → [Advanced] → select [Start Menu] in [All Users] → [Programs] → delete the [Canon] folder.

Cannot use the software after upgrading to Windows XP/Vista.

Have you upgraded Windows 2000 to Windows XP without removing the software?

Remove the software, then reinstall it. (See "Uninstalling Software" and "Set Up Computers and Software".)



Uninstalling Software

If the printer driver or fax driver become unnecessary, follow the procedure below to uninstall them.


Remark
  • Confirm the following before performing the uninstallation
  • That you have the installation software (if you want to re-install the drivers)
  • No applications are running on your computer
  • You must be the user with administrative privileges.
  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] (Windows 2000/Server 2003) or [All Programs] (Windows XP/Vista/Server 2008) → [Canon] → [Uninstall Drivers].
  1. Click [Delete] in the [iR Drivers Uninstaller].
  • If you click [Cleanup], all the files and registry information related to the selected driver are deleted. Click [Delete] to perform a normal uninstallation of the driver.
  1. Click [Yes] to confirm the deletion.
  1. Click [Exit].


Maintenance

This category describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace toner cartridge.



Cleaning the Machine

If the original is not copied clearly, clean the machine. For high-quality printouts, we recommend cleaning the machine once or twice a month.


Remark
  • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so may result in damage to the machine components.
  • Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges.
  • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
  • You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
  • If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
  • Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.

Exterior

Interior

Fuser Roller


Transcription Roller


Drum Unit


Scanning Area

Cleaning the Platen Glass


Cleaning the ADF


Cleaning the ADF Automatically



Exterior

Return to Overview

  1. Make sure no documents are stored in memory.
  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Wipe the machine's exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution.
  1. Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Interior

Return to Overview

Clean the machine's print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.


Fuser Roller

Transcription Roller

Drum Unit


Fuser Roller

Return to Overview

If black streaks appear with printing, the fuser roller in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, clean the fuser roller in the following procedure. The roller should also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper into the stack bypass and start cleaning.


Remark
  • Cleaning the roller takes approximately 100 seconds.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Open the stack bypass.
  1. Pull out the stack bypass extension until it clicks, then open it.
  1. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper.
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FIX. UNIT CLEANING>, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode.

  • Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.
  • Throw away the cleaning paper after use.


Transcription Roller

Return to Overview

If the back of the paper is smudged after printing, the transcription roller may be dirty. Clean the transcription roller in the following procedure.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press[] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Confirm that <TRANS. ROLR CLEAN> is displayed, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode.



Drum Unit

Return to Overview

If print quality decreases, the drum in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, use the Drum Cleaning function to clean the drum.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <DRUM CLEANING>, then press [OK].

Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode.



Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.


Cleaning the Platen Glass

Cleaning the ADF

Cleaning the ADF Automatically


Cleaning the Platen Glass

Return to Overview

Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF in the following procedure.

  1. Open the ADF/platen glass cover.
  1. Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF/platen glass cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Close the ADF/platen glass cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.


Cleaning the ADF

Return to Overview

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area, film, and roller.

  1. Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
  1. Open the ADF cover.
  1. Clean the rollers and rubber parts (A) inside the ADF cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.
  1. Lift the original feeder tray.
  1. Clean the rollers (B) below the original feeder tray with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  1. Lower the original feeder tray.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Close the ADF cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Open the ADF/platen glass cover.
  1. Clean the ADF scanning area (on the left side of the platen glass) and the document feeding roller with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
  1. Close the ADF/platen glass cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  1. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.


Cleaning the ADF Automatically

Return to Overview

If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the ADF, clean the ADF roller by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it.


Remark
  • Use LTR paper as cleaning paper.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <FEEDER CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Load 5 sheets of blank paper into the ADF, then press [OK].

ADF cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode.



Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When toner runs out completely and prints can no longer be made, the message <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> appears on the display.
Follow the following procedure to help you replace the toner cartridge.


Remark
  • If you continue copying when the <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> message appears, copying may stop halfway or may not be performed.
  1. Open the front cover.
  1. Pull the toner cartridge lever (A) towards you.
  • Do not pull the toner cartridge out until the message <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> appears on the display.
  1. Turn the lever clockwise as far as it will go.
  1. Pull the cartridge out of the machine.
  • Do not shake the used toner cartridge or hold it in a vertical position. Doing so may cause the toner to spill. Put the toner cartridge in the original plastic case for disposal.

  1. Remove the plastic case from the box.
  1. Open the case and remove the toner cartridge. Keep the box and case for future use.
  • Do not touch the portions (A), and (B).
  • Do not pull out the seal (C) before inserting the cartridge into the machine as the toner may spill out.

  1. Pull the toner cartridge lever (A) towards you and insert the cartridge into the machine with the arrow (B) pointing towards the machine.
  1. Holding the cartridge steady with one hand, pull out the seal completely with the other hand.
  • Do not pull out the seal at an angle.
  1. Turn the toner cartridge lever as far as it will go counterclockwise.
  1. Push down the lever.
  1. Close the front cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • If you cannot close the front cover, do not force it to close. Open the front cover and pull out the toner cartridge, then reinsert the cartridge into the machine.


Replacing the Drum Unit

When the message <REPLACE THE DRUM> appears on the display, replace the drum unit.


Remark
  • Do not throw used drum unit into open flames, as they may ignite the toner remaining inside the unit, and result in burns or a fire.
  • If you use the machine without inserting the drum unit, <INSERT THE DRUM> appears on the display. In this case, turn OFF the main power, and install the drum unit into the machine.
  1. Open the left cover.
  1. Holding the grips on the drum unit, slightly lower and remove it from the machine.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly as it becomes very hot during use.
  1. Open the package of the new drum unit and remove the protective packing material (A).
  1. Hold the unit by its grips on both sides.
  1. Align the marks on both sides of the drum unit (B) with the marks on the machine (A), and push the unit into the machine as far as it will go.
  • Do not touch the fixing assembly as it becomes very hot during use.
  1. After the unit is completely inserted, remove the orange paper.
  1. Close the left cover.
  • Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
  • Do not touch the surface of the drum (A) as the image quality of printouts may deteriorate.



Adjusting the Machine

This section describes the settings to improve the print quality and prevent paper jams which may occur when a variety of functions are used.

Use of these settings will help to prevent a number of problems before they occur.


Adjusting Print Quality (SPECIAL MODE M)

Reducing Paper Curl (SPECIAL MODE N)

Adjusting Print Density (SPECIAL MODE P)

Adjusting the Waiting Time for Next Printing (SPECIAL MODE S)

Adjusting Print Quality during Continuous Printing

Reducing the Paper Smudge

Adjusting Toner Fixing for Large-Sized Paper

Adjusting Feeder Smudge


Adjusting Print Quality (SPECIAL MODE M)

Return to Overview

If print quality decreases, the transcription output may not work adequately. Use Special Mode M to improve the print quality.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE M>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <MID>, <LOW> or <HIGH>, then press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

<MID>:In normal circumstances, use the default setting. Outputs can be printed by the normal density.

<LOW>:Compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that was stored for a long period of time at high temperature and high humidity.

<HIGH>:Compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight paper.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Reducing Paper Curl (SPECIAL MODE N)

Return to Overview

When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely. Use Special Mode N to prevent paper curling.


Remark
  • Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or high humidity for an extended period of time. Two-sided printing on such paper will frequently result in paper curl.
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE N>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not prevent paper curl.

<ON>: The machine prevents paper curl.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Adjusting Print Density (SPECIAL MODE P)

Return to Overview

When you use lightweight paper for printing, set this function to 'ON'.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE P>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not prevent from getting uneven print density.

<ON>: The machine prevents from getting uneven print density.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Adjusting the Waiting Time for Next Printing (SPECIAL MODE S)

Return to Overview

When you are in a hurry for printing, you can reduce the waiting time to start the next set of printout by using Special Mode S.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPECIAL MODE S>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <SPEED PRIORITY>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not reduce the waiting time to start the next set of printout.

<SPEED PRIORITY>: The machine reduces the waiting time to start the next set of printout.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Adjusting Print Quality during Continuous Printing

Return to Overview

Set whether to prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page during continuous printing of half-tone prints or photographs.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <CONT.PRINT MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page.

<ON>: The machine prevents the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Reducing the Paper Smudge

Return to Overview

Set whether to prevent the back edge of paper from smudging.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <BACK EDGE MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not prevent the back edge of paper from smudging.

<ON>: The machine prevents the back edge of paper from smudging.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Adjusting Toner Fixing for Large-Sized Paper

Return to Overview

Set whether to improve toner fix on large-sized paper.

  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LARGE PAPER MODE>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <ON>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not improve toner fix on large-sized paper.

<ON>: The machine prevents toner fix on large-sized paper.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.


Adjusting Feeder Smudge

Return to Overview

If the ADF is dirty, dots or lines may appear on copies or prints. The Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode prevents dirt and grime in the ADF from appearing on your prints and copies.
The default setting is <OFF>.


Remark
  • If either <JPEG> or <PDF (COMPACT)> is selected for <IMAGE FORMAT> in <TX/RX SETTINGS>, the setting for this mode is not applied.
  • While some dots or lines may continue to be printed even if the Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode is set to <ON>, copies are significantly clearer than when this mode is set to <OFF>.
  1. [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <ADJUST./CLEANING>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [ ] to select <ON> or <OFF>, then press [OK].

<OFF>: The machine does not prevent dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on prints and copies.
<ON>: The machine prevents dirt and grime in the ADF from appearing on prints and copies.

  1. Press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.


Transporting the Machine

Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance.


Remark
  • Be sure at least two people carry the machine.
  1. Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the back of the machine.
  1. Make sure the stack bypass and the paper stopper are back in their original position.
  1. Pick up the machine using the provided hand grips on the left and right sides.
  • Be sure at least two people carry the machine.
  • Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments. Dropping the machine can cause personal injury.
  • If you are using the Cassette-Feeding Module-N2 (optional), transport the machine and the Cassette-Feeding Module-N2 separately. If you transport the machine with the Cassette-Feeding Module-N2 being installed, you may drop the machine.
  • If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before carrying. (See "Specifications.")


Specifications

Remark
  • Specifications are subject to change without notice.


General

Return to Overview


General
  • Type
Personal Desktop
  • Power Source
120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
  • Power Consumption
Approx. 0.98kW (maximum)
  • Warm up Time
imageRUNNER 1025/1025N:
Less than 16 seconds*
imageRUNNER 1025iF:
Less than 19 seconds*
(temperature: 68°F (20°C), humidity: 65%; from when the machine turns ON the power main switch until the standby display appears)
* Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine.
  • Weight
imageRUNNER 1025:
Approx. 48.5 lb (22.0 kg) (including drum unit/excluding toner cartridge)
imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF:
Approx. 53.1 lb (24.1 kg) (including drum unit/excluding toner cartridge)
  • Dimensions
imageRUNNER 1025:
14 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (378 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) 19 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (506 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) (with optional paper drawer)
imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF:
17 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (453 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W))
22 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (581 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) (with optional paper drawer)
  • Installation Space
38 3/4" (D) x 44" (W) (984 mm (D) x 1,117 mm (W)) (including optional card reader)
  • Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 59°F–86°F (15°C–30°C)
Humidity: 10%–80% RH
  • Display Languages
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
  • Acceptable Originals
Originals Requirements
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Requirements
  • Printable Area
Printable Area
  • Scanning Area
Scanning Area


Copier

Return to Overview


Copier
  • Scanning Resolution
600 dpi x 600 dpi
  • Printing Resolution
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi
  • Magnification
1:1 ±1.0%, 1:2.000, 1:1.290, 1:0.780, 1:0.640, 1:0.500
Zoom 0.500 - 2.000, 1% increments
  • First Copy Time
Platen glass: less than 8 seconds (LTR)
ADF: less than 12 seconds (LTR)
  • Copy Speed
Paper drawer: LTR 25 cpm (Direct)
Stack bypass: LTR 24 cpm (Direct)
  • No. of Copies
99 copies maximum


Printer

Return to Overview


Printer
  • Printing Method
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
  • Paper Handling
  • Paper drawer:500 sheets x 1 drawer (21 lb (80 g/m2)
  • Stack Bypass: 100 sheets (21 lb (80 g/m2))
  • Paper Delivery
100 sheets (17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80g/m2))
  • Print Speed
Copy Speed
  • Printing Resolution
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi
  • Number of Tones
256
  • Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridge


Scanner

Return to Overview


Scanner
  • Type
Color scanner
  • Max Scanning Size
8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)
  • Scanning Resolution
25–9600 dpi (ScanGear iR)
  • Scanning Speed
Color: 2.56 msec/line (600 dpi)
Grayscale: 2.56 msec/line (600 dpi)
  • Host Interface
USB 1.1, USB 2.0
  • System Requirements
Windows 2000 Professional/XP/Vista
  • Device Driver
TWAIN and WIA (Windows XP/Windows Vista only) compliant


Facsimile (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview


Facsimile
  • Applicable Line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
  • Compatibility
G3
  • Data Compression Schemes
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
  • Modem Speed
33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
  • Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG,
transmitting from memory
  • Fax Resolution
FINE: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
PHOTO: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
SUPER FINE: 203 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
ULTRA FINE: 406 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (16 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
STANDARD: 203 pels/in. x 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
  • Dialing
  • Speed dialing
    One-touch speed dialing (23 destinations)
    Coded speed dialing (177 destinations)
    Group dialing (199 destinations in a group maximum)
    Address Book dialing (with Address Book key)
  • Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
  • Automatic redialing
  • Manual redialing (with Recall key)
  • Sequential broadcast (201 destinations)
  • Automatic reception
  • Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
  • ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
  • TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
  • TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.


Telephone (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview


Telephone
  • Connection
  • External telephone/answering machine/data modem


Send (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview


Send
Send to file server
  • Communication Protocol
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
  • Data Format
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
  • Resolution
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
  • System Environment
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
  • Interface
USB 2.0, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
  • Color Mode
Color, B&W (black and white)
  • Original Type
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
E-mail and I-Fax Features*1
  • Communication Protocol
SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode)
  • Resolution
For Sending E-mail: 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
For Sending I-Fax: 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
  • Format
E-mail: TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
I-Fax: TIFF (MH)
  • Original Size
E-mail: LTR, LGL, STMTR, STMT, A4, A5, A5R, B5
I-Fax: LTR, LGL*2, STMTR*2, STMT*2, A4*2, A5*2, A5R*2, B5*2
  • Server Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2), Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5

*1 Only the B&W mode is available for sending and receiving I-fax documents.
*2 Sent as LTR


Cassette Feeding Module-N2 (Optional)

Return to Overview


Cassette Feeding Module-N2 (Optional)
  • Paper Feeding System
500 sheets x 1 drawer (21 lb bond (80 g/m2))
  • Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Requirements
  • Power Source
From the main unit
  • Dimensions
6 1/4" (H) x 17 3/8" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (158 mm (H) x 440 mm (D) x 520 mm (W))
  • Weight
Approx. 11.46 lb (5.2 kg)


Card Reader-E1 (Optional)

Return to Overview


Card Reader-E1 (Optional)
  • Available Cards
Magnetic type card, Optical type card
  • Card Readout Method
Magnetic/Optical readout
  • Magnetic Card Reading Direction
Inserting Direction
  • Store/Replay
Replay
  • Power Source
From the main unit
  • Dimensions
1 1/4" (H) x 4" (D) x 3 1/2" (W) (32 mm (H) x 100 mm (D) x 88 mm (W))
  • Weight
Approx. 5/8 lb (295 g)


Originals Handling

Originals Requirements

Scanning Area


Originals Requirements

Return to Overview


Platen Glass ADF
Type Plain paper
Thick originals
Photographs
Small originals (e.g., index cards)
Special types of paper (e.g., tracing paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.)
Book (Depth: max. 7/8" (20 mm))
Plain paper (Multiple pages of originals of the same size, thickness and weight or one-page originals.)
Size (W x L) 8 1/2" x 14" maximum
(216 mm x 356 mm maximum)
8 1/2" x 14" maximum (216 x 356 mm maximum)
5 1/2" x 5" minimum (139.7 x 128 mm minimum)
Weight 4.4 lb (2 kg) maximum One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 34 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
Two-sided scanning: 13 to 28 lb bond (50 to 105 g/m2)
Quantity 1 sheet 50 sheets maximum*2
(25 sheets maximum for LGL originals)

*1 When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the original after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
*2 21 lb bond (80 g/m2) paper

  • Do not place the originals on the platen glass or in the ADF until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the originals is completely dry.
  • Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the originals in the ADF.
  • To prevent originals jams in the ADF, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies


Scanning Area

Return to Overview

Make sure your original's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.



Print Media

Paper Requirements

Printable Area


Paper Requirements

Return to Overview


  Paper drawer(s) Stack bypass
Size (W x L) LGL, LTR, OFICIO, FLSP, BRAZIL-OFICIO, MEXICO-OFICIO, A4 3" x 5" to Legal (8 1/2" x 14")
(76 x 127 to 216 x 356 mm)
Weight 17 to 24 lb bond
(64 to 90 g/m2)
15 to 34 lb bond
(56 to 128 g/m2)
Quantity 500 sheets maximum*1 100 sheets maximum*1
Type Plain *2
Color *2
Recycled *2
Heavy 1 *3
Heavy 2 *4 -
Heavy 3 *5 -
Bond *6
3hole punch paper *7
Transparency *8 -
Labels -
Envelopes -

(○: available -: not available)
*1 21 lb bond (80 g/m2) paper
*2 From 17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2)
*3 From 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2)
*4 From 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m2)
*5 From 28 to 34 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m2)
*6 20 lb bond (75 g/m2)
*7 LTR size only
*8 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.

Remark
  • The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See "Setting Paper Type and Size.")

  • To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
  • The following types of paper do not print well:
  • Highly textured paper
  • Very smooth paper
  • Shiny paper
  • Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
  • Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
  • Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location.
  • Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
  • Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type transparencies with this machine.


Printable Area

Return to Overview

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.

  • Copy Printable Area

  • Fax Printable Area



Machine Settings

You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER DATA LIST.



Printing USER DATA LIST
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <REPORT SETTINGS>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <LIST PRINT>, then press [OK].
  1. Press [] or [] to select <USER DATA LIST>, then press [OK].


Accessing the Setting Menu
  1. Press [Additional Functions].
  1. Press [] or [] to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK].

<COMMON SETTINGS>, <COPY SETTINGS>, <TX/RX SETTINGS>, <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, <PRINTER SETTINGS>, <TIMER SETTINGS>, <ADJUST./CLEANING>, <REPORT SETTINGS>, <SYSTEM SETTINGS>

  • The menus described above are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF.
  1. Press [] or [] to select a submenu, then press [OK].
  1. To register the settings or go to a submenu, then press [OK].
  1. When finished, press [Stop] to return to the standby mode.
  • If you press [Stop] before pressing [OK], the setting will not be registered.
  • Press [Additional Functions] to return to the previous display.


Settings Menu

The menus described in this section are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available and the number on the top of each menu may vary.


COMMON SETTINGS

COPY SETTINGS

TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

ADDRESS BOOK SET. (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

PRINTER SETTINGS

TIMER SETTINGS

ADJUST./CLEANING

REPORT SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS


COMMON SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. DEFAULT SETTINGS Selects which standby display appears when turning on the power.
  • COPY
  • SEND
  • SCAN
Setting the Initial Function
2. AUTO CLEAR SET. Selects which standby display appears after the Auto Clearing function is activated. Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates

INITIAL FUNCTION

Sets to return standby display that is selected in <DEFAULT SETTINGS>.

SELECTED FUNCTION

Sets to return standby display of the current mode.
3. AUDIBLE TONES Sets whether to sound audible tones and adjusts their volume. Setting the Audible Tones

1. ENTRY TONE

Beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
  • ON (1-3)*1
  • OFF

2. ERROR TONE

Beeps when an error (e.g., paper jam) occurs.
  • ON (1-3)*1
  • OFF

3. TX JOB DONE TONE

Beeps when an error (e.g., a paper jam) occurs.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)*1
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)*1

4. RX JOB DONE TONE

Beeps when a document is received.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)*1
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)*1

5. SCAN DONE TONE

Beeps when scanning is completed.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)*1
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)*1

6. PRINT DONE TONE

Beeps when printing is completed.
  • ERROR ONLY (1-3)*1
  • OFF
  • ON (1-3)*1
4. TONER SAVER MODE Sets whether to reduce toner consumption.
  • OFF
  • ON
Setting the Toner Save Mode
5. PRINTER DENSITY Recalibrates the density adjustment scale if differences between the image in the document and the print occur. (1-9) Adjusting the Print Density
6. AUTO DRAWER SELCT Sets whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job. Sets whether to select the appropriate paper source based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax). Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching

1. COPY

Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when copying.
  • 1. DRAWER 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. DRAWER 2 (ON/OFF)*2
  • 3. STACK BYPASS (OFF/ON)

2. PRINTER

Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when printing.
  • 1. DRAWER 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. DRAWER 2 (ON/OFF)*2

3. RECEIVE

Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when receiving fax/I-fax documents.
  • 1. DRAWER 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. DRAWER 2 (ON/OFF)*2
  • 3. STACK BYPASS (OFF/ON)

4. OTHER

Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when printing a report or list.
  • 1. DRAWER 1 (ON/OFF)
  • 2. DRAWER 2 (ON/OFF)*2
  • 3. STACK BYPASS (OFF/ON)
7. SELECT PAPER TYPE Sets the paper type for the paper drawer. For the Paper Drawer

1. DRAWER 1

Sets the paper type for paper drawer 1.

2. DRAWER 2*2

Sets the paper type for paper drawer 2.
8. REG. PAPER SIZE Sets the paper size for the paper drawer. For the Paper Drawer

1. DRAWER 1

Sets the paper size for paper drawer 1.

2. DRAWER 2*2

Sets the paper size for paper drawer 2.
9. ENERGY IN SLEEP Selects power consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode between two levels.
  • LOW
  • HIGH
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
10.BYPASS STD SET Sets the standard paper size and type for the stack bypass if you always use a same kind of paper. For the Stack Bypass

OFF

Deactivates the stack bypass standard settings.

ON

Activates the stack bypass standard settings.

1. PAPER SIZE

Sets paper size as the stack bypass standard.

2. SELECT PAPER TYPE

Sets paper type as the stack bypass standard.
11.PAPER FEED SWITCH Selects the paper feed method when you want to make one-sided or two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it). Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

1. STACK BYPASS

Selects the paper feed method for the stack bypass.

SPEED PRIORITY

Print speed has priority.

PRINT SIDE

The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing up. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing.
Only available for LTR, LGL and A4.

2. DRAWER 1

Selects the paper feed method for paper drawer 1.

SPEED PRIORITY

Print speed has priority.

PRINT SIDE

The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing down. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing.

3. DRAWER 2*2

Selects the paper feed method for paper drawer 2.

SPEED PRIORITY

Print speed has priority.

PRINT SIDE

The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing down. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing.
12.DISPLAY LANGUAGE Selects the language on the display. Changing the Language Shown on the Display
13.ADF DIRTY ERROR*3 Sets whether the error message will appear when the ADF is dirty.
  • DISPLAY
  • DO NOT DISPLAY
 
14.INIT. COMMON SET. Restores all <COMMON SETTINGS> to the default except for <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>.
  • OFF
  • ON
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

*1 Settings of the tone levels are not availeble on imageRUNNER 1025/1025N.
*2 Only for users of the optional paper drawer
*3 Not applicable for imageRUNNER1025.



COPY SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. IMAGE DIR PRIORITY Sets whether to activate the image direction priority.  

OFF

Copy orientation is same as the document.

ON

Copy orientation is rotated at 180 degrees.
2. STANDARD SETTINGS Sets the default setting for copying. Changing the Standard Mode

1. IMAGE QUALITY

Sets the document type for copying.
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO
  • TEXT/PHOTO

2. DENSITY

Sets the density for copying.
  • AUTO
  • MANUAL (1-9)

3. ZOOM RATIO

Sets the zoom ratio for copying.

PRESET RATIO

Selects the zoom from the preset ratios.
(100%, 115% B5→A4, 122% A5→B5, 129% STMT→LTR, 141% A5→A4, 200% MAX., 50% MIN., 64%, 70% A4→A5, 78% LGL→LTR, 81% B5→A5, 86% A4→B5)

MANUAL

Enters the zoom ratio by 1% increments. (50%–200%)

4. COPIES

Sets the number of copies (1-99).

5. AUTO COLLATE

Sets whether to collate the copies automatically.
  • OFF
  • COLLATE

6. TWO-SIDED

Sets the type of two-sided copying.
  • OFF
  • 1 > 2-SIDED
  • 2 > 2-SIDED
  • 2 > 1-SIDED

7. FRAME ERASE

Sets the type of Frame Erase copying.
  • OFF
  • ORG. FRAME ERASE
  • BOOK FRAME ERASE
  • BINDING HOLE

8. PAPER SELECT

Sets the paper source for copying.
  • DRAWER 1
  • DRAWER 2*1
  • AUTO
3. SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness of the copied image. (1-9) Adjusting Sharpness (Copy)
4. PAPER SIZE GROUP Selects a paper size group for your machine.
  • INCHES
  • A
  • AB
 
5. MM/INCH ENTRY Sets the unit of measurement of the frame erase width.
  • INCHES
  • MM
Enabling the Inch Entry
6. INIT. COPY SET. Restores all <COPY SETTINGS> to the default.
  • OFF
  • ON
Initializing the Standard Mode

*1 Only for users of the optional paper drawer



TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. COMMON SETTINGS Sets the features common to the fax and send functions.  

1. TX SETTINGS

Sets the transmission features.  

1. UNIT NAME

Registers your name/company name (24 characters maximum, including spaces). Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

2. DATA COMPRESSION

Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. Conversely, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
  • NORMAL
  • HIGH RATIO
  • LOW RATIO
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server)
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail)

3. RETRY TIMES

Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an e-mail, I-fax, or file server address. (0-5) Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax)
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (Scan to File Server)

4. SCANNING DENSITY

Adjusts the scanning density for sending documents. (1-9)  

5. STANDARD SETTINGS

Sets the default settings for sending documents. Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server)
Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail)

1. DENSITY

Sets the default density for the document you send.
  • STANDARD
  • DK
  • LT

2. IMAGE QUALITY

Sets the default image quality for the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

3. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the default file format for the document you send.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

4. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the default original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

5. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets whether to use <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> as the default.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. DIRECT TX

Sets whether to use <DIRECT TX> as the default.
  • OFF
  • ON

6. SEND SETTINGS

Sets the options for sending documents to an e-mail or I-fax address, or file server.  

1. TX FILE NAME

Sets the name of the document you send to an e-mail or I-fax address, or file server. (24 characters maximum, including spaces.) Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax
Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server
Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail

2. SUBJECT

Sets the subject for your e-mail/I-fax message. (40 characters maximum, including spaces.) Subject/Message (I-Fax)
Subject/Message (E-Mail)

3. MESSAGE TEXT

Sets the message body text for your e-mail/I-fax message. (140 characters maximum, including spaces.) Subject/Message (I-Fax)
Message (Scan to File Server)
Subject/Message (E-Mail)

4. REPLY-TO

Sets the reply-to address for your e-mail/I-fax message. (120 characters maximum, including spaces.) Reply-to (I-Fax)
Reply-to (E-Mail)

5. E-MAIL PRIORITY

Sets the priority for your e-mail message.
  • NORMAL
  • LOW
  • HIGH
E-Mail Priority

7. TX TERMINAL ID

Sets the options for sender information.  

1. PRINTING POSITION

Selects where the sender information is printed in small type at the top of each page.
  • OUTSIDE IMAGE
  • INSIDE IMAGE

2. TELEPHONE # MARK

Prefixes your number/I-fax address with the abbreviations FAX, IFAX, or TEL in your sender information.
  • FAX
  • TEL

8. COLOR TX GAMMA

Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient's machine, the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient's machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
(GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.2, GAMMA 1.0, GAMMA 1.4)
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server)
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail)

9. SHARPNESS

Sets the contrast of the images you scan. (1-7) Adjusting Sharpness (Fax)
Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax)
Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server)
Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail)

10. COLOR TX SCAN SET

Sets the priority for color scanned data.  

SPEED PRIORITY

Reduces the time spent in sending the document, but results in lower quality images.

IMAGE PRIORITY

Increases the time spent in sending the document, but results in higher quality images.

11. INIT STANDARD SET

Sets whether to restore <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> to the default.
  • OFF
  • ON
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax)
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax)
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server)
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail)

2. RX SETTINGS

Sets the reception features.  

1. TWO-SIDED PRINT

Sets the type of two-sided printing for faxing.
  • OFF
  • ON
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax)
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax)

2. RECEIVE REDUCTION

Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size. Reducing a Received Document (Fax)
Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax)

ON

Image reduction is turned on.

1. RX REDUCTION

Selects the reducing type.
  • AUTO
  • FIXED REDUCTION (90%, 95%, 97%, 75%)

2. REDUCE DIRECTION

Selects the reducing direction.
  • VERTICAL ONLY
  • HORIZ & VERTICAL

OFF

Image reduction is turned off.

3. CONT. PRINTING

Selects how the machine responds when the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears. Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax)
Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax)

RX TO MEMORY

The machine stores all documents in memory.

KEEP PRINTING

The machine does not store documents in memory if the toner runs out. Reset to <RX TO MEMORY> after replacing the toner cartridge.
2. FAX SETTINGS Sets the fax features.  

1. USER SETTINGS

Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode. User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings)

1. UNIT TELEPHONE #

Registers your fax number (20 characters maximum, including spaces). Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name

2. TEL LINE TYPE

Selects the telephone line type.
  • TOUCH TONE
  • ROTARY PULSE
Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax)

3. OFFHOOK ALARM

Sets whether the alarm sounds when the handset of the external telephone is off the hook.
  • ON
  • OFF
 

4. VOLUME CONTROL

Adjusts the monitor volume and the calling volume.  

1. MONITOR VOL. CTRL

Sets the volume for monitor tone during the fax transmission. (0-3)

2. CALLING VOLUME

Set the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call. (1-3)

2. TX SETTINGS

Sets the transmission features.  

1. ECM TX

Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is activated.
  • ON
  • OFF
ECM Transmission (Fax)

2. PAUSE TIME

Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing sequence. (1SEC–15SEC) Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax)

3. AUTO REDIAL

Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is busy or a transmission error occurs. Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax)

ON

Customizes the redial operation.

1. REDIAL TIMES

Sets the number of retries. (1TIMES–10TIMES)

2. REDIAL INTERVAL

Sets period of time before redialing. (2MIN.–99MIN.)

3. TX ERROR REDIAL

Sets whether the machine redials automatically when transmission error occurs.
  • ON
  • OFF

OFF

After the first attempt at dialing fails, redialing is not attempted.

4. TIME OUT

Sets whether to scan a document automatically after specifying the destination. (This function is not available when you dial with the numeric keys)
  • OFF
  • ON
 

5. DIALING LINE CHCK

Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.
  • OFF
  • ON
Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax)

3. RX SETTINGS

Sets the reception features.  

1. ECM RX

Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is activated.
  • ON
  • OFF
ECM Reception (Fax)

2. RX MODE

Selects the receive mode.
  • FaxOnly
  • FaxTel
  • AnsMode
  • DRPD
  • Manual
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax)

3. FAX/TEL OPT. SET

Sets the optional items in the <FaxTel> mode. Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax)

1. RING START TIME

Sets the time the machine takes to check whether a call is a fax or a voice call. (0SEC–30SEC)

2. F/T RING TIME

Selects the ring length for voice calls. (15SEC–300SEC)

3. F/T SWITCH ACTION

Selects whether the machine switches to the receive mode after the ring time has elapsed, or whether if disconnects the call.
  • RECEIVE
  • DISCONNECT

4. DRPD:SELECT FAX

Selects the ring pattern for fax calls.
  • DOUBLE RING
  • SHORT-SHORT-LONG
  • SHORT-LONG-SHORT
  • OTHER RING TYPE
  • NORMAL RING
 

5. INCOMING RING

Sets whether the external telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call or fax, enabling you to answer the voice call. This function is only available when the <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>. Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax)

OFF

The telephone does not ring when the machine receives a voice call or fax. (In the Sleep mode, the telephone may ring one or two times, if <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>.)

ON

The telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call or fax if an external telephone is connected.

RING COUNT

Sets the number of incoming rings before the machine answers. (1TIMES–99TIMES)

6. REMOTE RX

Sets whether to use remote receiving. Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax)

ON

The machine enables remote receiving. Activating Remote Receive Mode (Fax)

REMOTE RX ID

You can dial a code on remote extension to start receiving a document.
A combination of two characters using 0 to 9, * and # is possible.

OFF

The machine disables remote receiving.

7. MANUAL/AUTO

Sets whether the machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode.  

OFF

The external telephone keeps ringing until someone answers the call manually.

ON

The machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified time.

F/T RING TIME

Sets the length of time to elapse before the machine switches to document receiving. (1SEC–99SEC)


ADDRESS BOOK SET. (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. FAVORITES BUTTONS Registers destinations together with a combination of the scan and send settings for frequent use. (M1–M4: One-touch keys 01 to 04 are used for this feature.)  

FAX

Registers fax numbers. Registering a Favorites Button (Fax)

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces).

3. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the image quality.
  • FINE
  • PHOTO
  • SUPER FINE
  • ULTRA FINE
  • STANDARD

4. OPTIONAL SETTING

Selects whether to use the advanced functional settings for each one-touch key registered in the machine.

OFF

The optional setting is not set for this destination.

ON

The optional setting is set for this destination.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Select the transmission speed.
(33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps)

3. INTERNATIONAL

Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL

Registers e-mail addresses. Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail)

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum).

3. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format for a file attached to an e-mail message.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

4. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

5. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

6. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO
 

IFAX

Registers I-fax addresses. Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax)

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum).

3. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

4. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

5. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

FTP

Registers FTP addresses.  

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server)

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

6. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

8. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

9. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO

SMB

Registers SMB addresses.

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum).

6. IMAGE FORMAT

Sets the file format.
  • PDF
  • TIFF (B&W)
  • PDF (COMPACT)
  • JPEG

7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES

Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file.

OFF

Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.

ON

Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.

8. IMAGEQUALITY

Sets the resolution of the document you send.
(200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi)

9. ORIGINAL TYPE

Sets the original type for the document you send.
  • TEXT/PHOTO
  • TEXT
  • PHOTO
2. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL Registers the destinations on one-touch keys (23 destinations maximum)  

FAX

Registers fax numbers. Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces).

3. OPTIONAL SETTING

Sets the optional settings for sending faxes.

OFF

The optional setting is not set.

ON

The optional setting is set.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Selects the transmission speed.
(33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps)

3. INTERNATIONAL

Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL

Registers e-mail addresses. Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum).

IFAX

Registers I-fax addresses. Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum).

FTP

Registers FTP addresses. Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

SMB

Registers SMB addresses.

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum).
3. CODED SPD DIAL Registers the destinations for coded dial codes. Up to 177 destinations can be registered.  

FAX

Registers fax numbers. Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY

Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces).

3. OPTIONAL SETTING

Sets the optional settings for sending faxes.

OFF

The optional setting is not set.

ON

The optional setting is set.

1. ECM

Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
  • ON
  • OFF

2. TX SPEED

Selects the transmission speed.
(33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps)

3. INTERNATIONAL

Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
  • DOMESTIC
  • LONG DISTANCE 1
  • LONG DISTANCE 2
  • LONG DISTANCE 3

E-MAIL

Registers e-mail addresses. Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum).

IFAX

Registers I-fax addresses. Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. I-FAX ADDRESS

Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum).

FTP

Registers FTP addresses. Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

SMB

Registers SMB addresses.

1. NAME

Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. HOST NAME

Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum).

3. FILE PATH

Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum).

4. LOGIN NAME

Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum).

5. PASSWORD

Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum).
4. GROUP DIAL Registers destinations in group addresses (199 destinations maximum). Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys
Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes

1. SELECT ADD/TEL NO

Registers the recipient's numbers and addresses by specifying the one-touch keys or coded dial codes.

2. NAME

Registers the group name (16 characters maximum, including spaces).


PRINTER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified.
(LTR, STMT, EXECUTIV, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10,
MONARCH, DL, A4, B5, A5, LGL)
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.
(PLAIN PAPER, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH PAPER, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE)
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE
3. COPIES Sets the number of documents printed. (1-999) COPIES
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING Sets whether to activate two-sided printing.
  • OFF
  • ON
2-SIDED PRINTING
5. PRINT QUALITY Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing. PRINT QUALITY

1. IMAGE REFINEMENT

Sets whether to print smoothly the jagged outlines of characters and graphics.
  • ON
  • OFF
IMAGE REFINEMENT

2. DENSITY

Adjusts the print density. (1-9) DENSITY

3. TONER SAVER

Sets whether the toner saving mode is enabled.
  • OFF
  • ON
TONER SAVER
6. PAGE LAYOUT Sets the printing layout. PAGE LAYOUT

1. BINDING

Sets the binding position for two-sided printing.
  • LONG EDGE
  • SHORT EDGE
BINDING

2. MARGIN

Sets the page margin in inches or millimeters.
  • INCHES (-01.90INCHES–01.90INCHES)
  • MM (-50.0MM–50.0MM)
MARGIN
7. COLLATE Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.
  • OFF
  • COLLATE
COLLATE
8. ERROR TIME OUT Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer. ERROR TIME OUT

ON

Sets the error time out period. (5SEC–300SEC)

OFF

The error time out is off.
9. INIT. PRINTER SET Restores all <PRINTER SETTINGS> to the defaults.
  • OFF
  • ON
INIT.PRINTER SET
10.PCL SETTINGS*1 Sets the PCL printer setting. PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only)

1. ORIENTATION

Sets the paper orientation.
  • PORTRAIT
  • LANDSCAPE
ORIENTATION (PCL Only)

2. FONT NUMBER

Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using the corresponding font numbers. (0-120) FONT NUMBER (PCL Only)

3. POINT SIZE

Specifies a point size for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font. (4.00–999.75) POINT SIZE (PCL Only)

4. PITCH

Specifies the pitch for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch scalable font. (0.44–99.99) PITCH (PCL Only)

5. FORM LINES

Sets the number of lines to be printed on a page. (5-128) FORM LINES (PCL Only)

6. SYMBOL SET

Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer. SYMBOL SET (PCL Only)

7. CUSTOM PAPER

Sets whether to use a custom paper size. CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only)

OFF

Disables you to specify a custom paper size.

ON

Enables you to specify a custom paper size.

1. UNIT OF MEASURE

Selects the unit of measurement to specify a custom paper size.
  • INCHES
  • MILLIMETERS

2. X DIMENSION

Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper. (05.00–14.00" (127–356 mm))

3. Y DIMENSION

Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper. (03.00–08.50" (76–216 mm))

8. APPEND CR TO LF

Sets whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received. APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only)

NO

The print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as the beginning of the next line).

YES

The print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received.

9. ENLARGE A4

Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.
* This setting is applicable for A4 paper and portrait orientation for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6 printing is not supported.
ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only)

OFF

All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.

ON

All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases.

10. BarDIMM*2

Sets whether to use the bar code printing function. BarDIMM (PCL Only)

ENABLE

Sets the bar code printing function to on.
FreeScape: ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF

DISABLE

Sets the bar code printing function to off.

11. RESET PRINTER

Clears all print jobs in progress and resets the printer function.
  • OFF
  • OFF
RESET PRINTER

*1 Only for users of the PCL Printer Kit
*2 This setting is available only if the bar code printing function is activated.



TIMER SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. DATE&TIME SETTING Sets the current date and time. Setting the Current Date and Time
2. TIME ZONE SETTING Sets the time zone of your machine's location. Setting the Time Zone
3. DATE TYPE SELECT Sets the date format.
  • MM/DD/YYYY
  • DD/MM YYYY
  • YYYY MM/DD
Setting the Date Type
4. AUTO SLEEP TIME Sets the auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time. (3MIN.–30MIN.)
  • ON
  • OFF
Setting the Sleep Mode
5. AUTO CLEAR TIME Sets the auto clear mode when the machine has no operation idle for a certain period of time. (1MIN.–9MIN.)
The machine returns to the standby mode.
  • ON
  • OFF
Setting the Auto Clear Time
6. DAYLIGHT SV.TIME Sets the daylight saving time mode. Setting the Daylight Saving Time

OFF

Deactivates the daylight saving time mode.

ON

Activates the daylight saving time mode.

1. START DATE/TIME

Sets the start date.
  • 1. MONTH
  • 2. WEEK
  • 3. DAY

2. END DATE/TIME

Sets the end date.
  • 1. MONTH
  • 2. WEEK
  • 3. DAY


ADJUST./CLEANING

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. TRANS. ROLR CLEAN Cleans the transcription roller. Transcription Roller
2. DRUM CLEANING Cleans the drum. Drum Unit
3. FIX.UNIT CLEANING Cleans the fuser roller. Fuser Roller
4. FEEDER CLEANING*1 Cleans the ADF. Cleaning the ADF Automatically
5. SPECIAL MODE M Sets to improve print quality or fix irregular print density. If print quality decreases or an irregularity in the print density appears, transcription output may not function adequately.  

MID

Selects in normal conditions.

LOW

Selects to compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that was stored for a long time at high temperatures and high humidity.

HIGH

Selects to compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight paper.
6. SPECIAL MODE N When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely or become jammed. Enable this setting to prevent paper curling or jamming.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
7. SPECIAL MODE P Sets to activate when lightweight paper or paper which is easy to get uneven print density is used for printing.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
8. SPECIAL MODE S Sets whether to reduce the waiting time for the next printout.
When you change the paper size after continuous printing, the machine may take a while to start the next printing.
 

OFF

Does not reduce the waiting time next set of printout. (default)

SPEED PRIORITY

Reduces the waiting time to start the next set of printout.
Print speed has priority; however, it is possible that a previously printed image may be printed faintly on the next output.
9. CONT. PRINT MODE Sets whether to prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page during continuous printing of half-tone prints or photographs.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
10.BACK EDGE MODE Sets whether to prevent back edge of paper from smudging.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
11.LARGE PAPER MODE Sets whether to improve toner fix on large size paper.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
12.AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ*1 Sets whether to activate smudge (due to dust or dirt) reduction during printing.
When the ADF is dirty, copies may contain unwanted dots or lines.
  • ON
  • OFF
Adjusting Feeder Smudge
13.MAINTENANCE CODE This setting is not functional in this model.  

*1 Not applicable for imageRUNNER1025.



REPORT SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. SETTINGS*1 Sets the report functions.  

1. TX REPORT

Sets whether the transmission report prints out. TX Report

PRINT ERROR ONLY

Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.

REPORT WITH TX IMAGE

Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
  • OFF
  • ON

OUTPUT YES

Prints a report every time you send a document.

REPORT WITH TX IMAGE

Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
  • OFF
  • ON

OUTPUT NO

No report is printed.

2. RX REPORT

Sets whether the reception report prints out.
  • OUTPUT NO
  • PRINT ERROR ONLY
  • OUTPUT YES
RX Report

3. ACTIVITY REPORT

Sets whether to automatically print the transaction report and selects its type. Activity Report

1. AUTO PRINT

Sets whether an activity report is printed automatically every 40 transactions.
  • OUTPUT YES
  • OUTPUT NO

2. TX/RX SEPARATE

Sets whether an activity report is printed separately for sending and receiving.
  • OFF
  • ON
2. LIST PRINT Prints reports/lists. Printing Reports and Lists Manually

1. ACTIVITY REPORT*1

Prints the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually. Printing Activity Report

2. SPEED DIAL LIST*1

Prints the list of destinations registered in Address Book.
  • 1. 1-TOUCH LIST
  • 2. CODED DIAL LIST
  • 3. GROUP DIAL LIST
Printing Speed Dial List

3. ADD BOOK DETAILS*1

Prints the details of Address Book.
  • 1. 1-TOUCH (DETAILS)
  • 2. CODED (DETAILS)
Printing Address Book Details List

4. USER DATA LIST

Prints the setting list registered in the menu. Printing User's Data List

*1 Only for the imageRUNNER1025iF.



SYSTEM SETTINGS

Return to Overview


Setting Item Description Applicable Page
1. SYS. MANAGER INFO Sets the system manager information to protect the contents of <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Once the system manager ID and system password is set, they must be entered every time you access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu. Specifying the System Manager Settings

1. SYS. MANAGER ID

Sets the system manager ID (seven digits).

2. SYSTEM PASSWORD

Sets the system manager password (seven digits).

3. SYSTEM MANAGER

Sets the system manager name (32 characters maximum, including spaces).
2. DEVICE INFO Sets the device information. Device Information Settings

1. DEVICE NAME

Registers the machine name (32 characters maximum, including spaces).

2. LOCATION

Registers the machine location (32 characters maximum, including spaces).
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID Sets if the Department ID management is used. Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

OFF

The Department ID management is not used.

ON

The Department ID management is used.

1. REGISTER DEPT. ID

Registers the Department ID (0001-1000).

1. PASSWORD

Registers the Department ID management password.

2. PAGE LIMIT SET.

Sets the page limits for scans, prints, and copies (0 - 999,999 pages).

1. TOTAL PRINT

Sets the total page limit.

1. RESTRICT TOTAL

Sets if the total page limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. PAGE TOTALS

Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages).

2. COPY

Sets the limit for copies.

1. RESTRICT COPY

Sets if the copy limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. COPY LIMIT

Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages).

3. SCAN

Sets the limit for scans.

1. RESTRICT B&W SCAN

Sets if the scan limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. SCAN LIMIT

Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages).

4. COLOR SCAN

Sets the limit for color scans.

1. RESTRICT CLR SCAN

Sets if the color scan limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. COLOR SCAN LIMIT

Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages).

5. PRINT

Sets the limit for prints.

1. RESTRICT PRINT

Sets if the print limit is used.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. PRINT LIMIT

Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages).

3. ERASE

Erases the Department ID and password.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. PAGE TOTALS

Displays, clears, and prints counter information.

1. VIEW PAGE TOTALS

Displays how much paper was used by each department.
  • 1. TOTAL PRINT
  • 2. COPY
  • 3. SCAN
  • 4. RESTRICT CLR SCAN
  • 5. PRINT

2. CLEAR ALL TOTAL

Clears counter information.

3. PRINT LIST

Prints counter information.

3. PDL JOBS W/OUT ID

Sets if print jobs from computers with unknown IDs are accepted or rejected. Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs

ON

Accepts print jobs from computers with unknown IDs.

OFF

Rejects print jobs from computers with unknown IDs.
4. MANAGE USER ID Sets if the User ID management is used.
  • OFF
  • ON
Managing User IDs
5. NETWORK SETTINGS*1 Sets the network setting. Network Settings

1. TCP/IP SETTINGS

Sets TCP/IP network. Setting IP Address Automatically

1. IP ADDRESS AUTO.

Sets whether to automatically set an IP address.

ON

Enables an IP address to the machine automatically.
  • 1. DHCP (ON/OFF)
  • 2. BOOTP (OFF/ON)
  • 3. RARP (OFF/ON)

OFF

Allocate an IP address to the machine manually.

2. IP ADDRESS

Registers a fixed IP address to the machine. Setting IP Address Manually

3. SUBNET MASK

Registers a fixed subnet mask address to the machine.  

4. GATEWAY ADDRESS

Registers a fixed gateway address to the machine.  

5. DNS SETTINGS

Sets the DNS server settings. Setting DNS

1. PRIMARY SERVER

Registers the primary server address.

2. SECONDARY SERVER

Registers the secondary server address.

3. HOST NAME

Registers the host name of the DNS server.

4. DOMAIN NAME

Registers the domain name of the DNS server.

5. DNS DYNA. UPDATE

This setting is not functional in this model.

6. CONFIGURE WINS

Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS. Setting WINS

1. WINS RESOLUTION

Sets whether to resolve a name with WINS.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. WINS SERVER

Registers the IP address of a WINS server.

7. USE LPD

Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
  • ON
  • OFF
 

8. RAW SETTINGS

Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.  

ON

Enables to use RAW.

1. USE BIDIRECTIONAL

Sets whether to use bidirectional communication.
  • ON
  • OFF

OFF

Disables to use RAW.

9. USE PASV MODE

Sets the PASV mode for FTP.
  • OFF
  • ON
Setting PASV Mode for FTP

10.FTP EXTENSION

Sets the FTP Extension settings.
  • OFF
  • ON
Setting FTP Extension

11.USE HTTP

Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) for the Remote UI.
  • ON
  • OFF
Setting the Use of HTTP

12.PROXY SETTINGS

Sets whether to use a Proxy server. Setting Proxy

1. USE PROXY

Enables to use a Proxy server.
  • OFF
  • ON

13.PORT NO.

Sets the port number settings. Setting Port Number

1. LPD

0-65535 (default:515)

2. RAW

0-65535 (default:9100)

3. HTTP

0-65535 (default:80)

4. SMTP RX

0-65535 (default:25)

5. POP3 RX

0-65535 (default:110)

6. FTP SENDING

0-65535 (default:21)

7. SMTP TX

0-65535 (default:25)

8. SNMP

0-65535 (default:161)

14.SET IP ADD RANGE

Sets whether to restrict the range of IP addresses. Controlling the Machine Access using IP addresses

OFF

Disables restriction of IP address of computers.

ON

Enables restriction of IP address of computers from which data (print/fax jobs) can be sent to the machine.

1. PERMIT/REJECT

Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified IP address.
  • REJECT
  • PERMIT

2. SET IP ADDRESS

Specifies the IP address range. <START IP ADDRESS> and <END IP ADDRESS> must be entered for each setting.
  • 1. IP ADDRESS 1
  • 2. IP ADDRESS 2
  • 3. IP ADDRESS 3
  • 4. IP ADDRESS 4

15.RX MAC ADD SET.

Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.  

OFF

Disables a MAC address filter.

ON

Specifies a MAC address filter to access. A MAC address must be entered for each setting.
  • 1. PERMIT RX ADD1
  • 2. PERMIT RX ADD2
  • 3. PERMIT RX ADD3
  • 4. PERMIT RX ADD4
  • 5. PERMIT RX ADD5

2. SMB SETTINGS*2

Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS network.  

1. USE SMB CLIENT

Sets if SMB client is used.

OFF

SMB client is not used.

ON

SMB client is used.

1. SERVER

Enters the NetBIOS name of the machine.

2. WORKGROUP

Enters the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to.

3. COMMENT

Enters a comment about the printer.

4. LM ANNOUNCE

Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. SNMP SETTINGS

Sets detailed information about SNMP. Setting SNMP

1. USE SNMP

Sets whether to activate SNMP.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. COMMUNITY NAME 1

Sets SNMP community name 1 (default: public).

3. COMMUNITY NAME 2

Sets SNMP community name 2.

4. SNMP WRITABLE 1

Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • ON
  • OFF

5. SNMP WRITABLE 2

Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
  • OFF
  • ON

4. DEDICATED PORT

Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
  • ON
  • OFF
Setting Dedicated Port

5. ETHERNET DRIVER

Specifies the type of network connection. Setting Speed and Duplex

1. AUTO DETECT

Selects the detection method of Ethernet driver.

AUTO

Sets the machine to determine the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100Base-TX) automatically.

MANUAL

Sets the communication mode and Ethernet type manually.

1. DUPLEX

Selects the communication mode.
  • HALF DUPLEX
  • FULL DUPLEX

2. ETHERNET TYPE

Selects the Ethernet type.
  • 10 BASE-T
  • 100 BASE-TX

6. VIEW IP ADDRESS

Checks the current network settings.  

1. IP ADDRESS

Checks the IP address.

2. SUBNET MASK

Checks the subnet mask.

3. GATEWAY ADDRESS

Checks the gateway address.

7. E-MAIL/I-FAX*2

  When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used

1. SMTP RX

Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
  • OFF
  • ON

2. SMTP SERVER

Registers the host name of the machine with the DNS server. When the SMTP Authentication is used

3. POP

Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using a POP server.
  • OFF
  • ON
When a POP Server is Used

4. E-MAIL ADDRESS

Enters the e-mail address your machine will use (64 characters maximum).

5. POP SERVER

Enters the POP server IP address or name (48 characters maximum).

6. POP ADDRESS

Enters the login name for access to the POP server (32 characters maximum).

7. POP PASSWORD

Enters the password for access to the POP server (32 characters maximum).

8. POP INTERVAL

Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically (0MIN.–99MIN.).

9. AUTH/ENC SETTINGS

Specifies authenticating method before sending e-mail. When no authentication is required

1. POP BEFORE SEND.

Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
  • OFF
  • ON

2. SMTP AUTH

Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
  • OFF
  • ON

8. STARTUP TIME SET.

Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine (0–300SEC). Setting Startup Time
6. COMMUNICATIONS*2 Sets the fax, e-mail, and I-fax communication.  

1. E-MAIL/I-FAX

Sets the e-mail/I-fax communications.  

1. MAX TX DATA SIZE

Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If the e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent. (0 to 99 MB) Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes
Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails

2. DIVIDED OVER MAX

Sets whether to divide a document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify.
  • OFF
  • ON
Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes
Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails

2. FAX SETTINGS

Sets the facsimile communication.  

1. TX START SPEED

Sets the transmission start speed for faxes. (33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps)  

2. RX START SPEED

Sets the reception start speed for faxes. (33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps)  

3. MEMORY LOCK

Sets whether to receive and store all documents in memory and not to print automatically. Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax)

OFF

Disables memory reception.

ON

Enables memory reception.

1. PASSWORD

Registers the password that protects the authority for accessing to memory.

2. REPORT PRINT

Sets whether to print a report on memory reception.
  • OFF
  • ON

3. MEMORY RX TIME

Sets whether to set a period for memory reception.

OFF

Disables setting a period of memory reception.

ON

Enables setting a period of memory reception.
  • 1. MEM RX START TIME
  • 2. MEM. RX END TIME
7. FORWARD ERR. SET.*2 Sets the machine to print and/or store received documents when document forwarding fails. Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax)
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax)

1. PRINT

Sets whether to print out the image if forwarding fails.
  • ON
  • OFF

2. STORE TO MEMORY

Sets whether to store the image in memory if forwarding fails.
  • OFF
  • ON
 
8. REMOTE UI*1 Sets whether to activate the Remote UI function to operate the machine and change the settings from a network computer using a web browser.
  • ON
  • OFF
Restricting the Remote UI
9. ACCESS TO DEST.*2 Sets restriction of the access to destinations. Restricting Access to Destinations

1. ADD. BOOK PASSWOR

Sets a password to restrict editing the Address Book. (7 digits maximum) Setting a Password for the Address Book

2. RESTRICT NEW ADD.

Sets whether to restrict registering or changing destinations for one-touch keys and coded dial codes*4. Sets whether to restrict making calls to the destinations not registered in Address Book.
  • OFF
  • ON*5
*4 Registration of group addresses is not restricted.
*5 You can still make calls using an external phone if all of the ollowing conditions are met:
  • The machine is in the Sleep mode
  • <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly>
  • <ENERGY IN SLEEP> is set to <LOW>
Restricting the New Address

3. FAX DRIVER TX

Sets whether to restrict sending faxes from a computer using the fax driver.
  • ON
  • OFF
Restricting PC Faxing

4. CONFIRM FAX NO.

Sets whether to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.
  • OFF
  • ON
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers
10.CHECKING THE LOG Sets whether to allow displaying the log. Checking the Job Log

ON

Enables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor].

OFF

Disables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor].
Activity Report will not be printed automatically.
11.LICENSE REGISTRA. Enter a license key using the numeric keys to activate the bar code printing function. Registering a License
12.USE DEVICE USB Sets whether to restrict jobs through the USB interface.
  • ON
  • OFF
Restricting the USB Interface Port
*1 Only for the imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF. You can use the imageRUNNER 1025 in a network environment if the optional Network Board is installed.
*2 Only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.